Home

7 - Silberauto

1. 126 Load Leveling System 119 LOCKS cio Gee hae Be ae eun 20 Auto Unlock 21 Automatic Door 21 Child Protection 23 baka HESS RE EE 20 Power Doof lt zc x xx 20 Low Tire Pressure System 186 Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH zu ka x goes 45 46 Lubrication Body 231 Lumbar Support 81 aintenance Free Battery 229 aintenance General 225 aintenance Procedures 225 aintenance Schedule 254 265 aintenance Sunroof 115 alfunction Indicator Light Check Engine 130 aster Cylinder Brakes 236 emory Feature Memory Seat 84 emory Seat 84 emory Seats and Radio 84 Mini Trip Computer BOT ee aes Automatic Dimming Electric Remote Exterior Folding odifications Alterations Vehicle onitor Tire Pressure System ulti Displacement Engine System ulti Function Control Lever New Vehicle Break In Period Occupant Restraints Occupant Restraints Sedan Octane Rating Gasoline Fuel Oil Change Indicator 134 Oil Change Indicator Reset 134 Oil Engine 226 250 Capacity od ia ber bees 249 Change Interval 226 CHECKING cum m Rea 226 DIPSUCK dore Rx es 226 Disposal ora Rem ws 228 Filter 3 tax ecg Re
2. 137 e Compass Display 3 5605 2 2 2 ems 137 e uconnect gps If Equipped 140 e Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features 140 121 122 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES 1 Air Outlet 2 Instrument Cluster 3 Hazard Switch 4 Analog Clock 5 Electronic Stability Program Off Button Traction Control System Off Button 6 Glove Compartment 7 Radio 8 Climate Control 9 Heated Seat Switch 10 Power Outlet 11 Ash Tray 12 Storage Compartment 81bf1166 13 Ignition Switch 14 Hood Release 15 Trunk Release Button 16 Headlight Switch If Equipped 123 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 81930b42 124 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS 1 Oil Pressure Warning Light Qu This light indicates low engine oil pres sure The light should turn on momen tarily when the engine is started If the light turns on while driving stop the vehicle and shut OFF the engine as soon as possible A single chime will sound when this light turns on Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected This light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine The engine oil level must be checked using the procedure shown in Section 7 2 Electronic Speed Control Adaptive Cruise Control ACC Indicator Light If Equipped This light will turn on when the electronic speed control or Adap tive Cruise Control
3. Older Children and Child Restraints Children who weigh more than 20 lbs 9 kg and who are older than one year can ride orward facing in the vehicle Forward facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward facing direction are for children who weigh 20 to 40 lbs 9 to 18 kg and who are older than one year These child seats are also held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system Refer to LATCH Child Seat Anchorage System Lower Anchors and Tether for CHil dren in this section B m The belt positioning booster seat is for children weighing more than 40 Ibs 18 kg but who are still too small to fit the vehicle s seat belts properly If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle s seat cushion while the child s back is against the seatback they should use a belt positioning booster seat The child and belt positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt Children Too Large for Booster Seats Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback should use the lap shoulder belt in a rear seat e Make sure that the child is upright in the seat e The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug as possible Check belt fit periodically A child s squirm ing or slouching can move the belt
4. 89 Checking Your Vehicle For Safety 49 Coolant Pressure Cap Radiator Cap 235 Dipsticks Checks Safety 49 Cooling System 233 Power Steering 175 Child Restraint 41 44 46 47 Adding Coolant Antifreeze 234 Disposal Child Restraint Tether Anchors 45 46 Coolant Capacity 249 Antifreeze Engine Coolant 235 Child Safety Locks 23 Coolant Level 233 235 Door LOCKS aee roem Ri 20 Child Seat eae eho ek ek 42 Disposal of Used Coolant 235 Door Locks Automatic 21 Clean Air Gasoline 193 Drain Flush and Refil 234 Driving Cleaning Inspection 235 On Slippery Surfaces 172 Wheels gt 239 Points to Remember 236 Through Flowing Rising or Shallow Windshield Wiper Blades 231 Pressure Cap 235 Standing Water 173 Radiator Cap 235 Electric Rear Window Defrost 119 Electric Remote Mirrors 58 Electrical Power Outlets 115 Electronic Brake Control System 177 Anti Lock Brake System 178 Brake Assist System 178 Electronic Stability Program 178 Traction Control System 178 Electronic Power Distribution Center FUSES ee OE oes 241 Electronic Speed Control Cruise Control
5. 90 91 indshield Wiper Blades 231 indshield Wipers 90 iper Blade Replacement 231 ipers Intermittent 91 ipers Rain Sensitive 91 299
6. OWNER REGISTRATION CERTIFICATE Selling Dealer OWNER Stamp ADDRESS Selling Dealer Signature Telephone Number Private Make Business Model have provided and explained the following Day pare oF Ree __ Registration No or License No OPERATING MANUAL Vehicle Handbook VEHICLE PRE DELIVERY INSPECTION CUSTOMER SIGNATURE DEALER SIGNATURE TABLE OF CONTENTS 3 0 o x o la a o m INTRODUCTION a o O a A A a TR EL 3 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE n 9 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE nnn 51 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL nn 121 STARTING AND OPERATING ccoo 155 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 205 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 4 25 a 219 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES ca ci it aa ee 253 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 0 277 INDEX a a afi fase es
7. under Occupant Re straints in Section 2 for more information 22 Vehicle Security Light If Equipped The Vehicle Security Light flashes rapidly when the Vehicle Security o Alarm is arming and slowly when the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed Refer to Vehicle Security Alarm in Section 2 for more infor mation 23 Fuel Gauge The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when the ignition switch is in the ON position 24 Electronic Throttle Control ETC Light This light will turn on briefly as a bulb check when the ignition Switch is turned ON This light will also turn on while the engine is running if there is a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control ETC system If the light comes on while the engine is run ning safely bring the vehicle to a complete Stop as soon as possible place the shift lever in PARK and cycle the ignition key The light should turn off If the light remains lit with the engine running your vehicle will usually be drivable However see an authorized dealer for Service as soon as possible If the light is flashing when the engine is running immediate service is required In this case you may experience reduced perfor mance an elevated rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing Also have the system checked by an autho rized dealer if the light does not come on during starting 25 Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Each t
8. CO C Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 56 250 Miles 90 000 km or 54 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 1 Rotate tires Inspect the rear axle fluid Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 270 62 500 Miles 100 000 km or 60 Months Maintenance Service Schedule a a a Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires If using your vehicle in dusty or off road conditions inspect the engine air cleaner filter and replace if necessary Inspect the brake linings and replace if necessary Replace the air conditioning filter if equipped Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter if using your vehicle for any of the following police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 68 750 Miles 110 000 km or 66 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Rotate tires Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 271 75 000 Miles 120 000 km or 72 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J Rotate tires Replace the engine air cleaner filter J Replace the fue
9. Dimmer Control The dimmer control is part of the headlight switch and is located on the left side of the in strument panel With the position lights or headlights on rotating the dimmer control up ward will increase the brightness of the instru ment panel lights and if equipped the lighting in the door map pockets and cupholders Dome Light Position Rotate the dimmer control completely upward to the second detent to turn on the interior lights The interior lights will remain on when the dimmer control is in this position Interior Light Defeat OFF Rotate the dimmer control to the extreme bot tom off position The interior lights will remain off when the doors are open Parade Mode Daytime Brightness Feature Rotate the dimmer control upward to the first detent This feature brightens all text displays such as the odometer EVIC if equipped and radio when the position lights or headlights are on WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS XA The multifunction lever operates the windshield wipers and washer when the ignition is placed in the RUN posi tion The lever is located on the left side of the steering column 031507267 Windshield Wiper Washer Control Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the first detent past the intermittent settings for ow speed wiper operation or to the second detent past the intermittent settings for high speed wiper operation CAUTION Turn the windshield w
10. Pya OFF When the switch is pressed to dis able the system the instrument cluster will display the PARK AS SIST DEACTIVATED message Refer to Electronic Vehicle Infor mation Center EVIC in Section 4 for further information When the shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the system is dis The ParkSense switch LED will be ON when ParkSense is disabled or defective The Park Sense switch LED will be OFF when the system is enabled Service ParkSense When the ParkSense system is defective the instrument cluster will actuate a single chime once per ignition cycle and it will display the SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM message Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 for further information The If SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM appears in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC after making sure the fascia bumper is clean please see your authorized dealer Cleaning the ParkSense Clean the ParkSense sensors with water car wash soap and a soft cloth Do not use rough or hard cloths Do not scratch or poke the sen sors Otherwise you could damage the sen sors 111 ParkSense System Usage Precautions NOTE Ensure that the front and rear bumpers are free of dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense system operating properly Jackhammers large trucks and other vi brations could affect the performance of the ParkSense system When you tu
11. Spanish languages as equipped WARNING Any voice commanded system should be used only in safe driving conditions following local laws and phone use All attention should be kept on the roadway ahead Failure to do so may result in an accident causing serious injury or death 60 Phone Button The rearview mirror contains the 0 microphone for the uconnect phone depending on the type of mirror and radio equipped and the radio contains the two control buttons that will enable you to ac cess the uconnect phone Voice Recognition Button e Actual button location may vary with radio The individual buttons are described the Operation section The uconnect phone can be used with Hands Free Profile certified Bluetooth cellular phones Some phones may not support all the uconnect phone features If your cellular phone supports a different profile e g Head set Profile you may not be able to use any uconnect phone features Refer to your cel lular service provider or the phone manufac turer for details The uconnect phone is fully integrated with the vehicle s audio system The volume of the uconnect phone can be adjusted either from the radio volume control knob or from the steering wheel radio control if so equipped The radio display will be used for visual prompts from the uconnect phone such as CELL or caller ID on certain radios Compatible Phones
12. The uconnect phone requires a cellular phone equipped with the Bluetooth Hands Free Profile version 1 0 or higher See uconnect website for supported phones e www chrysler com uconnect e www dodge com uconnect e www jeep com uconnect To find the list of compatible phones navigate through the following menus e Select model year for the vehicle e Select type of the vehicle e Mark the box if radio is equipped with Navi gation In the getting started tab select compatible phones Operation Voice commands can be used to operate the uconnect phone and to navigate through the uconnect phone menu structure Voice com mands are required after most uconnect phone prompts You will be prompted for a specific command and then guided through the available options e Prior to giving a voice command one must wait for the beep which follows the Ready prompt or another prompt e For certain operations compound com mands can be used For example instead of saying Setup and then Phone Pairing the following compound command can be said Setup Phone Pairing For each feature explanation in this section only the combined form of the voice command is given You can also break the commands into parts and say each part of the command when you are asked for it For example you can use the combined form voice command Phonebook New Entry or you can break the combined form command into two
13. 94 96 Electronic Stability Program ESP 178 Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light IPIE 129 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIO uu ea Bade Se hac 131 Emergency Deck Lid Release 27 Emergenoy In Case of Freeing Vehicle When Stuck 214 Hazard Warning Flasher 206 JACKING 2s 207 Jump Starting 212 Overheating 206 TOWING o RS 215 Emergency Trunk Release 27 292 ENGINE ule a es 221 222 223 224 Air 228 Block Heater 5 5 ge 164 Break In Recommendations 48 Checking Oil Level 226 Compartment 221 222 223 224 Coolant Antifreeze 233 250 COOIING iu a ues aa aS Ens 233 Exhaust Gas Caution 49 Failsto Start ae ie aa 161 Flooded Starting 161 Fuel Requirements 191 Jump Starting 212 Multi Displacement 175 a Fe PI 226 249 250 Oil Change Interval 226 Oil Filler 227 QUUBIE a 228 Oil Selection 227 249 Oil Synthetic 228 Overheating 206 scu bas a Mea Sites 159 Temperature Gauge 128 Engine Oil Viscosity 228 Engine Oil Viscosity Chart 228 Enhanced Accident Response Feature 38 Entry System Illuminated 16 EtliBho
14. Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals replace if necessary O O O C Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 259 75 000 Miles 120 000 km or 60 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J Rotate tires 1 If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Replace the air conditioning filter if equipped Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the rear axle fluid Flush and replace the engine coolant at 60 months if not done at 105 000 miles 168 000 km O O Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 82 500 Miles 132 000 km or 66 Months Maintenance Service Schedule J Change the engine oil and engine oil filter t 1 Rotate tires Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 260 90 000 Miles 144 000 km or 72 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires Replace the engine air cleaner filter Replace the spark plugs 5 7L Engine Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary Replace the air conditioning filter if equipped Inspect the brake linings re
15. Only Key Fobs that are programmed to the vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle Once a Key Fob is programmed to a vehicle it cannot be pro grammed to any other vehicle CAUTION e Always remove the Key Fobs from the vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended e For vehicles equipped with Keyless Go al ways remember to place the ignition in OFF At the time of purchase the original owner is provided with a four digit Personal Identifica tion Number PIN Keep the PIN in a secure ocation This number is required for authorized dealer replacement of Key Fobs Duplication of Key Fobs may be performed at an authorized dealer this procedure consists of programming a blank Key Fob to the vehicle electronics A blank Key Fob is one that has never been programmed NOTE When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System serviced bring all vehicle Key Fobs with you to the authorized dealer Customer Key Programming Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be performed at an authorized dealer General Information The Sentry Key operates on a carrier fre quency of 433 92 MHz The Sentry Key Immo bilizer system will be used in the following European countries which apply Directive 1999 5 EC Austria Belgium Czech Republic Denmark Finland France Germany Greece Hungary Ireland Italy Luxembourg Nether lands Norway Poland Portugal Romania Russian Fed
16. for the parking brake Always apply parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or dam age 170 The following indicators should be used to ensure that you have engaged the shift lever in the PARK position e When shifting into PARK move the shift lever all the way forward and left until it stops and is fully seated e Look at the shift indicator display on the instrument panel to ensure it is in the PARK position CAUTION Damage to the shifter could result if the shift lever is moved out of PARK before the ignition switch is turned from the LOCK OFF position with Keyless Go to ON position RUN position with Keyless Go REVERSE This range is used for moving the vehicle rearward Always stop before moving the shift ever to REVERSE NEUTRAL This range is used when the vehicle is standing for prolonged periods with the engine running The engine may be started in this range Set the parking brake if you must leave the vehicle CAUTION Coasting the vehicle or driving for any other reason with shift lever in NEUTRAL can result in transmission damage WARNING Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the ignition to coast down a hill These are unsafe practices that limit your response to changing traffic or road conditions You might lose control of the vehicle and have an acci dent DRIVE This range should be used for most city
17. 3 Third This range eliminates shifts into Overdrive The transmission will operate normally in 1st 2nd and 3rd while in this range The 3 position should also be used when descending steep grades to prevent brake system distress NOTE Using the 3 range while operating the vehicle under heavy operating conditions will improve performance and extend trans mission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup up Low This range should be used for engine braking when descending very steep grades In this range upshifts will occur only to prevent en gine overspeed while downshifts occur earlier than in other gear range selections CAUTION Never race the engine with the brakes on and the vehicle in gear and never hold the vehicle on an incline without applying the brakes These practices can cause overheating and damage to the transmission Torque Converter Clutch A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been added to the automatic transmission in this vehicle A clutch within the torque con verter engages automatically at calibrated speeds This may result in a slightly different feeling or response during normal operation in high gear When the vehicle speed drops or during acceleration the clutch automatically and smoothly disengages NOTE e The torque converter clutch will not en gage until the transmission fluid and en gine coolant is warm usually after 1 3 mile
18. 3 Attach the tether strap hook A of the child restraint to the anchor B and remove slack in the tether strap according to the child restraint manufacturer s instructions NOTE Ensure that the tether strap does not slip into the opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack in the strap WARNING An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to increased head motion and possible injury to the child Use only the anchor posi tions directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap Transporting Pets Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured or injure a passen ger during panic braking or in a collision Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts ENGINE BREAK IN RECOMMENDATIONS A long break in period is not required for the engine and drivetrain transmission and axle in your vehicle Drive moderately during the first 300 miles 500 km After the initial 60 miles 100 km speeds up to 50 or 55 mph 80 or 90 km h are desirable While cruising brief full throttle acceleration within the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break in Wide open throttle accel eration in low gear can be detrimental and should be avoided The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a high quality energy conserving type
19. Choose setting 5 or 6 if you desire more sensitivity The rain sense wipers will automatically change be tween an intermittent wipe slow wipe and a fast wipe depending on the amount of moisture that is sensed on the windshield Place the lever in the off position when not using the system NOTE e The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the wiper speed is in the low or high position e The Rain Sensing feature may not func tion properly when ice or dried salt water is present on the windshield 92 e Use of Rain X or products containing wax or silicone may reduce Rain Sensing performance e The Rain Sensing feature can be enabled or disabled Refer to Rain Sensing Inter mittent Wipers under Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features un der Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 The Rain Sensing system has protective fea tures for the wiper blades and arms It will not operate under the following conditions e Low Temperature Wipe Inhibit The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the ignition is placed in the RUN position the vehicle is stationary and the outside tem perature is below 32 F 0 C unless the wiper control on the multifunction lever is moved the vehicle speed becomes greater than 0 mph 0 km h or the outside tempera ture rises above freezing Neutral Wipe Inhibit The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the ignition is
20. F 7 C will decrease the tire pressure to approximately 26 psi 179 kPa This tire pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the TPM Telltale Light Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 27 psi 186 kPa but the TPM Telltale Light will still be ON In this situation the TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF only after the tires are inflated to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pressure value CAUTION e The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures and warning have been estab lished for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use aftermarket tire sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result Continued CAUTION Continued e After inspecting or adjusting the tire pres sure always reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could dam age the TPM sensor NOTE e The TPMS is not intended to replace nor mal tire care and maintenance or to pro vide warning of a tire failure or condition e The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure e Driving on a significantly under i
21. It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal the vehicle could acceler ate quickly forward or in reverse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal General Information The automatic transmission selects individua gears automatically dependent upon e Altitude e Vehicle loading e Driving style e Shift lever position e Accelerator position Vehicle speed The gear shifting process is continuously adapted dependent on the driving style the driving situation and the road characteristics NOTE e After selecting any driving position wait a moment to allow the gear to engage fully before accelerating especially when the engine is cold If there is a need to restart the engine be sure to turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position OFF position with Key less Go before restarting Transmis sion engagement may be delayed up to 10 seconds after restart if the ignition switch is not turned to the LOCK position OFF position with Keyless Go first e The electronically controlled transmis sion provides a precise shift schedule The transmission electronics are self calibrating Therefore the first few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat abru
22. No 1 Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel Fuel ULSD should only be used where extended arctic conditions 10 F 23 C exist NOTE e Use of Climatized ULSD Diesel Fuel or Number 1 ULSD Diesel Fuel results in a noticeable decrease in fuel economy e Climatized ULSD Diesel Fuel is a blend of Number 2 ULSD and Number 1 ULSD Diesel Fuels which reduces the tempera ture at which wax crystals form in fuel NOTE This engine requires the use of Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel Fuel Use of incorrect fuel could result in exhaust system damage Re fer to Fuel Requirements in this section for further details on fuel recommendations Battery Blanket Usage A battery loses 60 of its cranking power as the battery temperature decreases to 0 F 18 C For the same decrease in temperature the engine requires twice as much power to crank at the same RPM The use of battery blankets will greatly increase starting capability at low temperatures Suitable battery blankets are available from your authorized MOPAR dealer Engine Starting Procedure WARNING NEVER pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the air inlet opening in an attempt to start the vehicle This could result in a flash fire causing serious personal injury 1 The shift lever must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK position before you can start the engine 2 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position 3 Watch for the Wait To Start Light in the instrume
23. Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset When the fuel economy is reset the display will read RESET or show dashes for two seconds Then the history information will be erased and the averaging will continue from the last fuel average reading before the reset The FUEL SAVER MODE message will display above the average fuel economy in the EVIC display This message will appear whenever MDS if equipped allows the engine to operate on four cylinders or if you are driving in a fuel efficient manner ILY SHUER MODE FUEL Aver ase MFG 25 9 P Reset 1145 mi Fuel Saver Mode On 819793f8 This feature allows you to monitor when you are driving in a fuel efficient manner and it can be used to modify driving habits in order to in crease fuel economy 819793f4 Fuel Saver Mode Off e Distance To Empty DTE Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with the fuel remaining in the tank This estimated distance is determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous and average fuel economy according to the current fuel tank level DTE cannot be reset through the FUNCTION SELECT button NOTE Significant changes in driving style or ve hicle loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of the vehicle regardless of the DTE displayed value When the DTE value is less than 30 miles 48 km estimated driving distance the DTE display will change to a text displ
24. Spare Tire Fastener 4 Remove the spare tire 5 Remove the fastener securing the jack 81b31802 Jack Fastener 207 WARNING A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a colli sion or hard stop could endanger the occu pants of the vehicle Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places provided Preparations For Jacking 1 Park the vehicle on a firm level surface as far from the edge of the roadway as possible Avoid icy or slippery areas WARNING Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic Pull far enough off the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel 2 Set the parking brake 3 Place the shift lever in PARK 4 Turn OFF the ignition 5 Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher 208 6 Block the front and rear of the wheel diago nally opposite of the jacking position For ex ample if changing the right front tire block the left rear wheel NOTE Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked Jacking and Changing a Tire WARNING Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle e Always park on a firm level surface as far from the edge of the roadway as possible before raising the vehicle e Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be raised WARNING Continued e Set the parking
25. The capabilities of an ESP equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner that could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others The ESP system has two available operating modes ESP On This is the normal operating mode for the ESP Whenever the vehicle is started the ESP sys tem will be in this mode This mode should be used for most driving conditions The ESP should only be turned OFF for specific reasons as noted in the following paragraphs Partial Off The Partial Off mode is intended for times when a more spirited driving experience is desired It is also intended for driving in deep snow sand or gravel This mode disables the TCS portion of the ESP and raises the threshold for ESP activation which allows for more wheel spin than what ESP normally allows The ESP OFF switch is located on the switch bank in the center of the instrument panel To enter the Partial Off mode momentarily press the ESP OFF switch and the ESP TCS Indica tor Light will illuminate To turn the ESP on again momentarily press the ESP OFF switch and the ESP TCS Indicator Light will turn off d ESP OFF Switch 179 NOTE To improve the vehicle s traction when driv ing with snow chains or when starting off in deep snow sand or gravel it may be desir able to switch to the Partial Off mode by momentarily pressing the ESP OFF switch Once
26. This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when the doors are locked with the RKE transmitter When this feature is turned on and the vehicle is equipped with the Passive Entry system using the Passive Entry system to LOCK the vehicle will cause the parking lights 17 to flash This feature can be turned on or turned off To change the current setting proceed as follows e For vehicles equipped with the EVIC refer to Flash Lights with Remote Key Lock under Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features under Electronic Vehicle Informa tion Center EVIC If Equipped in Section 4 e For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following procedure 1 Press and hold the UNLOCK button on a programmed RKE transmitter for at least 4 sec onds but no longer than 10 seconds Then press and hold the LOCK button while still holding the UNLOCK button 2 Release both buttons at the same time 3 Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by pressing the LOCK UNLOCK buttons on the RKE transmitter with the ignition switch in the OFF position and the key removed 4 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE trans mitter while you are in the vehicle will acti vate the security alarm Opening a door with the security alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the
27. This light shows only that the parking brake is applied It does not show the degree of brake application 16 Electronic Stability Program ESP Traction Control System TCS Indicator Light If this indicator light flashes during acceleration ease up on the ac celerator pedal and apply as little throttle as possible Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions and do not switch off the Electronic Stability Program ESP Re fer to Electronic Stability Program in Section 5 for more information 17 Temperature Gauge The temperature gauge shows engine coolant temperature Any reading within the normal range indicates that the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher temperature when driving in hot weather up mountain grades or when towing a trailer It 128 engine OFF immediately and call for service should not be allowed to exceed the upper imits of the normal operating range CAUTION Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage your vehicle If the temperature gauge reads H pull over and stop the ve hicle Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range If the pointer remains on the H and you hear continuous chimes turn the WARNING A hot engine cooling system is dangerous You or others could be badly burned by steam or boiling cool
28. a normal fixed speed cruise control mode is available for cruising at fixed speeds The Normal cruise control mode is designed to Maintain a set cruising speed without requiring the driver to operate the accelerator Cruise control can only be operated if the vehicle speed is above 25 mph 40 km h To change modes press and hold the MODE button for at least one second in either the OFF state or the READY state Normal Cruise Ready will be displayed once the mode be comes available To switch back to ACC press and hold the MODE button again for at least one second WARNING In the normal cruise control mode the system will not react to vehicles ahead In addition the proximity warning does not activate and no alarm will sound even if you are too close to the vehicle ahead since the presence of the vehicle ahead nor the vehicle to vehicle dis tance is detected Be sure to maintain a safe distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead Always be aware which mode is se lected To set a Desired Speed When the vehicle reaches the speed desired tap the lever down and release SET DECEL The EVIC will display the set speed NOTE You must observe the display when setting or changing speed not the speedometer To Vary the Speed Setting There are two ways to change the set speed Use the accelerator pedal to adjust the ve hicle to the desired speed and push the lever
29. and loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disas semble or modify the system Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged i e bent retractor torn webbing etc If there is any question regarding belt or retractor condition replace the belt Airbag Warning Light The light should come on and remain on for six to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON If the light is not lit during starting see your authorized dealer If the light stays on flickers or comes on while driving have the system checked by an authorized dealer 50 Defroster Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the blower control on high speed You should be able to feel the air directed against the windshield See your authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoper able Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside the Vehicle Tires Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear patterns Check for stones nails glass or other objects lodged in the tread Inspect the tread and sidewall for cuts and cracks Check the wheel nuts for tightness Check the tires including spare for proper pressure Lights Have someone observe the operation of exte rior lights while you work the controls Check turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the i
30. e Do not use water alone or alcohol based engine coolant antifreeze products Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products as they may not be compatible with the radiator engine coolant antifreeze and may plug the radiator e This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze Use of propylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze is not recom mended Adding Coolant Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine coolant antifreeze that allows ex tended maintenance intervals This engine coolant antifreeze can be used up to five years or 102 000 miles 170 000 km before replacement To prevent reducing this ex tended maintenance period it is important that you use the same engine coolant antifreeze throughout the life of your vehicle Please re view these recommendations for using Hybrid Organic Additive Technology HOAT engine coolant antifreeze When adding engine coolant antifreeze e The manufacturer recommends using MO PAR Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula HOAT Hybrid Organic Additive Technology or equivalent e Mix a minimum solution of 50 HOAT engine coolant antifreeze and distilled water Use higher concentrations not to exceed 70 if temperatures below 34 F 37 C are an ticipated e Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized water when mixing the water engine coolant
31. lubricant Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions under which vehicle operations will occur The recom mended viscosity and quality grades are shown in Engine Oil under Maintenance Procedures in section 7 of this manual NON DETERGENT OR STRAIGHT MINERAL OILS MUST NEVER BE USED A new engine may consume some oil during its first few thousand miles kilometers of opera tion This should be considered a normal part of the break in and not interpreted as an indi cation of difficulty Additional Requirements For Diesel Engine If Equipped During the first 1500 km avoid heavy loads e g driving at full throttle Do not exceed 2 3 of the maximum permissible engine speed for each gear Change gear in good time Do not shift down a gear manually in order to brake SAFETY TIPS Transporting Passengers EVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO AREA WARNING e It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Continued WARNING Continued Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts e Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly Exhaust Gas WARNING Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is color
32. pull upward on the head restraint to it s highest position push in both buttons at the base of each head restraint rod and simultaneously pull up on the head restraint ce 7 p 030907586 Removing Head Restraint To install the head restraint insert the head restraint rods into each guide apply pressure down on the headrest until the head restraint reaches the first lock position push the large button in and push down and adjust head restraint to desired position NOTE Ensure that the front of the head restraint is facing toward the front of the vehicle 81 WARNING Driving a vehicle with the head restraints removed or improperly adjusted could cause serious injury or death in the event of a collision The head restraints should always be checked prior to operating the vehicle and never adjusted while the vehicle is in motion Always adjust the head restraints when the vehicle is in PARK Heated Seats If Equipped This feature heats the front driver and passen ger seats The controls for each front seat are located near the bottom center of the instru ment panel 82 Front Heated Seat Switch On vehicles equipped with rear heated seats the seats closest to the doors are heated The controls for these seats are located on the rear of the center console Rear Heated Seat Switch After turning the ignition to RUN you can choose from a High or Low heat setting Amber indicator lig
33. sliding doors and hood hinges should be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease such as MOPAR Spray White Lube or equivalent to assure quiet easy operation and to protect against rust and wear Prior to the application of any lubricant the parts concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit after lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed Particular attention should also be given to hood latching components to ensure proper function When performing other underhood services the hood latch release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated The external lock cylinders should be lubri cated twice a year preferably in the Fall and Spring Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant such as MOPAR Lock Cylinder Lu bricant or equivalent directly into the lock cylinder Windshield Wiper Blades Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner This will remove accumulations of salt or road film Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may cause deterioration of the wiper blades Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from the windshield Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil gasoline etc NOTE Life expectancy of wiper bl
34. solvents detergents or ammonia based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery Application of a leather conditioner is not required to maintain the original condi tion WARNING Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning pur poses Many are potentially flammable and if used in closed areas they may cause respira tory harm Cleaning Headlights Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are ighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be followed To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and reducing light output avoid wiping with a dry cloth To remove road dirt wash with a mild soap solution followed by rinsing Do not use abrasive cleaning components solvents steel wool or other aggressive mate rial to clean the lenses Glass Surfaces All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with MOPAR Glass Cleaner or any commercial household type glass cleaner Never use an abrasive type cleaner Use cau tion when cleaning the inside rear window equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear quarter window equipped with the radio antenna Do not use scrapers or other sharp instrument that may scratch the elements When cleaning the rear view mirror spray cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror Cleaning
35. the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and or passengers An improperly latched seat could cause serious injury Continued WARNING Continued e The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle with the rear seatbacks in the locked up or folded down position should not be used as a play area by children when the vehicle is in motion They could be seriously in jured in an accident Children should be seated and using the proper restraint sys tem e To help protect against personal injury passengers should not be seated in the rear cargo area The rear cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes only not for passengers who should sit in seats and use seat belts REAR WINDOW FEATURES Rear Window Defroster The rear window defroster button is located on the climate control Press this button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors if equipped An indicator in the button will illumi nate when the rear window defroster is on The rear window defroster automatically turns off after approximately 10 minutes For an addi tional five minutes of operation press the but ton a second time CAUTION Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the heating elements e Use care when washing the inside of the rear window Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the win dow Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution
36. tion on LATCH see Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH in this section 28 NOTE The Advanced Front Airbags have a multi stage inflator design This allows the airbag to have different rates of inflation based on severity and type of collision Please pay close attention to the informa tion in this section It tells you how to use your restraint system properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as possible WARNING In a collision you and your passengers can suffer much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers or you can be thrown out of the vehicle Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buck led up properly Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver even on short trips Someone on the road may be a poor driver and cause a collision that includes you This can happen far away from home or on your own street Research has shown that seat belts save lives and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the vehicle Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times Lap Shoulder Belts All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with combination lap shoulder belts The belt webbing retractor
37. Am rica frente a Plaza Miraflores Tegucigalpa Honduras Tel 504 235 9220 Fax 504 232 6564 HUNGARY Chrysler Automotive Hungaria Kft H 1133 Budapest Karpat u 21 Tel 36 1 887 7000 Fax 36 1 887 7098 IRELAND C J IRELAND CONCESSIONAIRES LIMITED Clonlara Avenue Baldonnell Business Park Baldonnell Dublin 22 Ireland Tel 1890 946866 ITALY Chrysler Italia S r l Via Giulio Vincenzo Bona 110 00156 Roma Tel 06 41442812 Fax 06 418823114 E mail talktoGchrysler com LATVIA TC MOTORS LTD 40 Krasta Str LV 1003 Riga Tel 07 812 312 FAX 07 812 313 LITHUANIA Silberauto AS Laisves av 125 A LT 2022 VILNIUS Tel 02 301037 Fax 02 301036 NETHERLANDS Chrysler Nederland B V Postbus 2088 NL 3500 GB Utrecht Tel 31 0 30 247 19 11 Fax 31 0 30 247 16 00 NEW ZEALAND Chrysler New Zealand Private Bag 14907 Panmure New Zealand Tel 09573 7800 Fax 09573 7808 NORWAY Chrysler Norge A S Solheimveien 7 N 1471 L renskog Tel 47 67 92 60 00 Fax 47 67 90 53 10 PANAMA Grupo Q de Panam Calle 50 Final Edificio 68 San Francisco Panam Panam Tel 507 303 1100 Fax 507 303 0980 PARAGUAY Cencar S A Avda Mariscal Lopez No 5700 Asuncion Paraguay Tel 59521515911 Fax 59521515924 283 PERU Divemotor S A Calle Alejandro Bussalleu 151 Urb Sta Cat alina La Victoria Lima Peru Tel 51 1 712 2000 Fax 51 1 712 2002 POLAND Chrysl
38. Belt Operating Instructions 1 Enter the vehicle and close the door Sit back and adjust the front seat 2 The seat belt latch plate is above the back of your seat Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to make the belt go around your lap Pulling Out the Lap Shoulder Belt Latch Plate 3 When the belt is long enough to fit insert the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click Connecting Latch Plate To Buckle WARNING e belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will not protect you properly The lap portion could ride too high on your body possibly causing internal injuries Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you e A belt that is too loose will not protect you as well In a sudden stop you could move too far forward increasing the possibility of injury Wear your seat belt snug e A belt that is worn under your arm is very dangerous Your body could strike the in side surfaces of the vehicle in a collision increasing head and neck injury A belt worn under the arm can cause internal injuries Ribs aren t as strong as shoulder bones Wear the belt over your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the force in a collision Continued 30 WARNING Continued e A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you from injury during a collision You are more likely to hit your head in a
39. D D D C O 100 000 Miles 160 000 km or 96 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires Replace the engine air cleaner filter Replace the fuel filter water separator unit Inspect the brake linings and replace if necessary Replace the air conditioning filter if equipped Inspect the exhaust system Inspect the CV joints Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals and replace if necessary Change the rear axle fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter Flush and replace the engine coolant Replace the accessory drive belt s Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 274 WARNING You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Do only that service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent mechanic 275 276 278 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE The manufacturer distributors are vitally inter ested in your satisfaction with their products and services If a servicing problem or other difficulty should occur we recommend that you tak
40. ELECTRONIC PROGRAM WIPER INTERMITTENT FAILURE LOW SPEED CONTROL ASSIST SYSTEM BRAKE Cs gt a ae 2 e I BRAKE SYSTEM WINDSHIELD MASTER LIGHTING LOW BEAM KEY ACTIVATE UPPER AND LOWER un md TIRE PRESSURE HILLDESCENT WARNING PARKING WASHER SWITCH POWER OUTLET AIROUTLET MONITOR CONTROL BRAKE ort EY FUEL FILL SIDE REAR WINDOW WINDSHIELD WASHER DOME LIGHT FRONT FOG LIGHT HOOD RELEASE LOWER AIR RECIRCULATION CONVERTIBLE TRACTION ALL WHEEL FAILURE OF ANTHOCK WASHER FLUID LEVEL OUTLET 4 WINDOW DOWN CONTROL DRIVE BRAKING SYETEM Pe Ie 20 07 OF el Y E JA 4WDI BRAKE WINDSHIELD ELECTRONIC BRAKE SYSTEM ENGINE OIL REAR WINDOW CLECTRICALLY PARK LIGHTS REAR FOG UND VEA DEFHOS VENTILATINGFAN WINDOW LOCK THROTTLE FOUR WHEEL WARNING PARKING DEFROST HEATED LOWER AIR OUTLET CONTROL DRIVE BRAKE Rm an Y TOW 1 ul W a5 fi We HAUL BATTERY HEATED MIRROR WINDSHIELD INSTRUMENT PANEL BEAT BELT SLIDING DOOR a DECK AIR CONDITIONING RECOGNITION WARNING TOW HAUL CHARGING DEFROST ILLUMINATION BUTTON C e 4 w e S c L s GLOW PLUG POWER WINDSHIELD WIPER SIDE AIRBAG AIRBAG SUDINGDOOR EMERGENCY LIGHTER ANDTETHERFOR UCONNECT HAZARD FOUR WHEEL STEERING FLU WASHER RELEASE HANDLE CHILDREN LATCH BUTTON DRIVE LOW SRS Y C9 6 588 Aa tc bs A AS 2 MALFUNCTION TRANS ENGINE COOLANT SUPPLEMENTAL PASSENGER DOOR AJAR CONVERTIBLE CONVERTIBLE HORN OWNERS AIR E
41. ENSE 187 Premium System If Equipped 189 e General Information 191 e FUEL REQUIREMENTS GASOLINE ENGINES 191 OPAALIERIIEG 191 3 5 and 5 7L Engines sine see 192 158 STARTING PROCEDURES Before starting your vehicle adjust your seat adjust the inside and outside mirrors fasten your seat belt and if present instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat belts Automatic Transmission The shift lever must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK position before you can start the engine Apply the brakes before shifting into any driv ing gear WARNING e Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally in jured Do not leave the key fob in the ignition switch A child could operate power windows other controls or move the ve hicle e Do not leave animals or children inside parked vehicles in hot weather interior heat buildup may cause serious injury or death CAUTION Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed e Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop e Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine is at idle speed e Do not shift from REVERSE PARK or NEUTRAL into any forward g
42. Gasoline Engines ACEA Categories For countries that use the ACEA European Oi Categories for Service Fill Oils use engine oils that meet the requirements of ACEA C3 and that are approved to MB 229 31 or MB 229 51 Engine Oil Selection 3 0L Diesel Engine For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating conditions the manufacturer recommends engine oils that meet the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 11106 and that are approved to Mercedes Benz MB 229 31 or MB 229 51 and ACEA C3 Engine Oil Viscosity SAE Grade 2 7L and 5 7L Engines SAE 5W 20 engine oil is recommended for all operating temperatures This engine oil im proves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy The engine oil filler cap also shows the recom mended engine oil viscosity for your engine For information on engine oil filler cap location refer to Engine Compartment in this section NOTE SAE 5W 30 engine oil approved to MB 229 31 or MB 229 51 may be used when SAE 5W 20 engine oil is not available Engine Oil Viscosity SAE Grade 3 5L Engine SAE 10W 30 engine oil is recommended for all operating temperatures The engine oil filler cap also shows the recom mended engine oil viscosity for your engine For information on engine oil filler cap location refer to Engine Compartment in this section In areas where these grades are not generally available higher SAE grades may
43. Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are molded in clear plastic When cleaning the lenses care must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic 1 Clean with a wet soft rag or micro fiber towel A mild soap solution may be used but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive cleaners If soap is used wipe clean with a clean damp rag 2 Dry with a soft tissue Seat Belt Maintenance Do not bleach dye or clean the belts with chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners This will weaken the fabric Sun damage can also weaken the fabric If the belts need cleaning use MOPAR Total Clean a mild soap solution or lukewarm water Do not remove the belts from the vehicle to wash them Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do not work properly Cleaning the Center Console Cupholders Clean with a damp cloth or towel using a mild detergent with the cupholder in the center console NOTE The cupholder cannot be removed FUSES Integrated Power Module The Integrated Power Module IPM is located in the engine compartment This module con tains fuses and relays 181 64814 Integrated Power Module CAUTION e When installing the integrated power mod ule cover it is important to ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully latched Failure to do so may allow water to get into the integrated power module and possibly result in an
44. Rear Passenger Rear Center lt 10 kg 0 to 9 months X U U lt 13 kg 0 to 24 months X U U 9 to 18 kg 9 to 48 months X U U 15 to 36 kg 4 to 12 years X U U Key of letters used in the table above U Suitable for universal category restraints approved for use in this mass group X Seat position not suitable for children in this mass group 42 straint system s recommended for each posi tion child restraint systems in this mass group and or this size class Vehicle ISOFIX Positions Chart Mass Group Size Class Fixture Front Passenger Rear Outboard Rear Center Other Sites F ISO L1 X X X X Carrycot G ISO L2 X X X X 1 X X X X E ISO R1 X 1UF X X 0 up to 10 kg 1 X X X X E ISO R1 X 1UF X X D ISO R2 X 1UF X X Dic Up ite 19kg ISO R3 X UF X X 1 X X X X D ISO R2 X 1UF X X C ISO R3 X 1UF X X B ISO F2 X 1UF X X 900 18 Kg B1 ISO F2X X TUF X X A ISO F3 X 1UF X X 1 X X X X Il 15 to 25 k 1 X X X X Ill 22 to 36 kg 1 X X Key of letters used in the table above 1UF Suitable for ISOFIX forward child re X ISOFIX position not suitable for ISOFIX 1 For the CRS which do not carry the ISO XX straint systems of universal category ap child restraint systems in this mass group size class identification A to G for the appli proved for use in the mass group and or this size class cable mass group the car manufacturer shal
45. S TEM Otoyolu Hadimkoy Cikisi 34900 Buyukcekmece Istanbul Tel 90 212 867 40 00 Fax 90 212 867 44 63 UKRAINE JSC AutoCapital Velyka Vasylkivska str 15 01004 Kyiv Tel 38 044 206 8888 Fax 38 044 206 8889 UNITED KINGDOM Chrysler UK Ltd Tongwell Milton Keynes MK15 8BA Tel 01908 301090 Fax 01908 301203 URUGUAY Malunix S A Miguelete 2276 Montevideo Uruguay Tel 598 2 401 7818 Fax 598 2 402 2666 VENEZUELA Chrysler de Venezuela LLC Avenida Pancho Pepe Croquer Zona Industrial Norte Valencia Estado Caraboro Tel 58 241 613 2400 Fax 58 241 613 2538 Fax 58 241 6132602 58 241 6132438 PO BOX 1960 Services And Parts Zona Industrial 11 Av Norte Sur 5 C C Calle Este Oeste C C LD Center Local B 2 Valencia Estado Carabobo Telf 58 241 6132757 58 241 6132773 Fax 58 241 6132743 285 CHANGE OF OWNERSHIP NOTIFICATION MODEL REGISTRATION OR LICENSE NUMBER de op or tj NEW OWNER S NAME NEW OWNER S ADDRESS IF RESOLD BY CHRYSLER JEEP DEALERSHIP TELEPHONE NO ENTER DEALER STAMP IN BOX ABOVE FIRST OWNER 80140712 286 CHANGE OF OWNERSHIP NOTIFICATION MODEL REGISTRATION OR LICENSE NUMBER de op or tj NEW OWNER S NAME NEW OWNER S ADDRESS IF RESOLD BY CHRYSLER JEEP DEALERSHIP TELEPHONE NO ENTER DEALER STAMP IN BOX ABOVE SECOND OWNER 80
46. Setup Phone Pairing When prompted after the beep say Pair a Phone and follow the audible prompts You will be asked to say a four digit Personal Identification Number PIN which you will later need to enter into your cellular phone You can enter any four digit PIN You will not need to remember this PIN after the initial pairing process 61 e For identification purposes you will be prompted to give the uconnect phone a name for your cellular phone Each cellular phone that is paired should be given a unique phone name e You will then be asked to give your cellular phone a priority level between 1 and 7 with 1 being the highest priority You can pair up to seven cellular phones to your uconnect phone However at any given time only one cellular phone can be in use connected to your uconnect phone The priority allows the uconnect phone to know which cellular phone to use if multiple cellular phones are in the vehicle at the same time For example if priority 3 and priority 5 phones are present in the vehicle the uconnect phone will use the priority 3 cellular phone when you make a call You can select to use a lower priority cellular phone at any time refer to Ad vanced Phone Connectivity Dial by Saying a Number e Press the K button to begin 62 e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Dial e The system will prompt you to say the num ber you want to
47. The trunk of your vehicle is equipped with an emergency release handle It is located on the inside of the trunk lid near the latch and is coated so that it glows in a darkened trunk Pull on the handle to open the trunk Trunk Emergency Release OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle are the restraint systems e Three point lap and shoulder belts for the driver and all passengers e Advanced Front Airbags for driver and front passenger e Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Cur tains SABIC for the driver and passengers seated next to a window if equipped e Supplemental Side Seat Airbags if equipped 27 An energy absorbing steering column and steering wheel Knee bolsters blockers for front seat occu pants e Front seat belts incorporate pretensioners to enhance occupant protection by managing occupant energy during an impact event if equipped e All seat belt systems except the driver s include Automatic Locking Retractors ALRs which lock the seat belt webbing into position by extending the belt all the way out and then adjusting the belt to the desired ength to restrain a child seat or secure a arge item in a seat if equipped If you will be carrying children too small for adult sized seat belts the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH feature also can be used to hold infant and child restraint systems For more informa
48. an oxygenate made from methanol i does not have the negative effects of methanol CAUTION Use of fuel with ethanol content higher than 10 may result in engine malfunction starting and operating difficulties and materials deg radation These adverse effects could result in permanent damage to your vehicle Clean Air Gasoline Many gasolines are now being blended to contribute to cleaner air especially in those areas where air pollution levels are high These new blends provide a cleaner burning fuel and some are referred to as reformulated gasoline The manufacturer supports these efforts toward cleaner air You can help by using these blends as they become available Materials Added to Fuel Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper octane rating gasolines that contain detergents corrosion and stability additives are recommended Using gasolines that have these additives will help improve fuel economy reduce emissions and maintain vehicle perfor mance Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents should be avoided Many of these ma terials intended for gum and varnish removal may contain active solvents or similar ingredi ents These can harm fuel system gasket and diaphragm materials WARNING Carbon monoxide CO in exhaust gases is deadly Follow the precautions below to pre vent carbon monoxide poisoning e Do not inhale exhaust gases They contain carbon monoxide a co
49. and highway driving It provides the smoothest up shifts and downshifts and the best fue economy The transmission automatically upshifts through fifth gear The DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteristics under all nor mal operating conditions When frequent transmission shifting occurs such as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions in hilly terrain travel ing into strong head winds or while towing heavy trailers use the AutoStick Electronic Range Select ERS mode to select a lower gear Delayed Shifts in Cold Temperatures During cold temperature operation you may notice delayed upshifts depending on engine and transmission temperature as well as ve hicle speed This feature improves warm up time of the engine and transmission to achieve maximum efficiency Temporary Transmission Limp Home Mode The transmission is monitored for abnormal conditions If a condition is detected that could result in transmission damage the transmission will engage Limp Home Mode If vehicle accel eration worsens or the transmission no longer shifts the transmission is most likely operating in the Limp Home Mode In this mode the transmission will remain in the current gear until the vehicle is brought to a stop After the vehicle has stopped PARK REVERSE and NEUTRAL will continue to operate Second gear will operate in the DRIVE position The Malfunction Indicator Light MIL may be illu
50. antifreeze solution The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling system Please note that it is the owner s responsibility to maintain the proper level of protection against freezing according to the temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is operated NOTE Mixing engine coolant antifreeze types will decrease the life of the engine coolant an tifreeze and will require more frequent en gine coolant antifreeze changes Cooling System Pressure Cap The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine coolant antifreeze and to ensure that engine coolant antifreeze will return to the radiator from the coolant recovery bottle The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces WARNING e The warning words DO NOT OPEN HOT on the cooling system pressure cap are a safety precaution Never add engine cool ant antifreeze when the engine is over heated Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an overheated engine Heat causes pressure to build up in the cooling system To prevent scalding or injury do not remove the pressure cap while the system is hot or under pressure e Do not use a pressure cap other than the one specified for your vehicle Personal injury or engine damage may result Disposal of Used Coolant Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant antif
51. area Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the TRIP ODOMETER button to turn off the message If the problem continues the mes sage will appear the next time the vehicle is started A loose improperly installed or damaged fuel filler cap may also turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center in this section for more information 125 8 Tachometer The red segments indicate the maximum per missible engine revolutions per minute RPM x 1000 for each gear range Ease up on the accelerator before reaching the red area 9 Rear Fog Light Indicator This indicator will illuminate when the rear fog lights are on Refer to Fog Lights under Lights in Section 3 for more information 10 Engine Temperature Warning Light This light will turn on and a single mb chime will sound to warn of an over e heated engine condition When this light turns on the engine temperature is Critically hot If the light turns on while driving safely pull over and stop the vehicle The vehicle should be turned OFF immediately and serviced as soon as possible Refer to If Your Engine Overheats in Section 6 for more infor mation 11 Wait To Start Light Diesel Engines Only The Wait To Start Light will turn on when the ignition key is first turned to the ON 126 position Wait until the Wait To Start Light turns OFF to start the eng
52. be adjusted when the vehicle is in REVERSE or when the Electronic Speed Control is on One of the following messages will display in the Electronic Ve hicle Information Center EVIC if equipped if a pedal adjustment is attempted when the System is locked out Adjustable Pedal Dis abled Cruise Control Engaged or Ad justable Pedal Disabled Vehicle In Re verse NOTE For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory Seat you can use your Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter or the memory switch on the driver s door trim panel to return the adjustable pedals to pre programmed positions Refer to Driver Memory Seat in this section CAUTION Do not place any article under the adjustable pedals or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to the pedal controls Pedal travel may become limited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the adjustable pedal s path WARNING Do not adjust the pedals while the vehicle is moving You could lose control and have an accident Always adjust the pedals while the vehicle is parked ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL When engaged Electronic Speed Contro takes over the accelerator operation at speeds greater than 25 mph 40 km h The Electronic Speed Control lever located on the left side of the steering column operates the system 032206834 1 RESUME ACCEL 2 SET DECEL 3 CANCEL 4 ON OFF To Activate Push the Electroni
53. compatible child seats so that two seats share a common lower an chorage If installing child seats in adjacent rear seating positions or if your child restraints are not LATCH compatible install the restraints using the vehicle s seat belts LATCH Anchorages Installing the LATCH Compatible Child Restraint System We urge you to follow the manufacturer s direc tions carefully when installing your child re straint Not all child restraint systems will be installed as described here Again carefully 46 follow the installation instructions that are pro vided with the child restraint system e when you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the intersection of the seatback and seat cushion surfaces The rear seat lower anchorages are round bars located at the rear of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback and are just visible In addition there are tether strap eff anchorages behind each rear Y seating position located the panel between the rear seatback and the rear window These tether strap anchorages are under a plastic cover with this symbol on it Many but not all restraint systems will be equipped with separate straps on each side with each having a hook or connector for attachment to the lower anchorage and a means of adjusting the tension in the strap Forward facing toddler restraints and some rear facing infant r
54. condition can result if either rating is exceeded You could lose control of the ve hicle and have an accident Tongue Weight TW The tongue weight is the downward force ex erted on the hitch ball by the trailer In most cases it should not be less than 7 or more than 10 of the trailer load Tongue weight must not exceed the lesser of either the hitch certification rating or the trailer tongue chassis rating It should not be less than 4 of the trailer load and not less than 55 Ibs 25 kg You must consider tongue load as part of the oad on your vehicle and its GAWR WARNING An improperly adjusted hitch system may reduce handling stability and braking perfor mance and could result in an accident Con sult with your hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable trailer dealer for additional infor mation Frontal Area The frontal area is the maximum height and maximum width of the front of a trailer Breakaway Cable Attachment e For fixed ball tow bar attach the clip directly European braking regulations for braked trail to the designated point This alternative must ers up to 7 700 lbs 3 500 kg require trailers to be specifically permitted by the trailer manu be fitted with either a secondary coupling or facturer since the clip may not be sufficiently breakaway cable strong for use in the way The recommended location for attaching the normal trailers breakaway cable is in the stamped slot locate
55. connected to the uconnect phone e Depending on the maximum number of en tries downloaded there may be a short delay before the latest downloaded names can be used Until then if available previous downloaded phonebook is available for use e Only the phonebook of the currently con nected cellular phone is accessible e Only the cellular phone s phonebook is downloaded SIM card phonebook is not part of the cellular phonebook e This downloaded phonebook cannot be ed ited or deleted on the uconnect phone These can only be edited on the cellular phone The changes are transferred and updated to uconnect phone on the next phone connection Phonebook Download Single Entry If equipped and supported by your phone uconnect phone allows the user to download entries from their phone via Bluetooth To use this feature press the button and say Phonebook Download The system prompts Ready to accept V card entry via Bluetooth The system is now ready to ac cept phonebook entries from your phone using the Bluetooth Object Exchange Profile OBEX Please see your phone Owners Manual for specific instructions on how to send these entries from your phone 63 NOTE e Phone handset must support Bluetooth OBEX transfers of phonebook entries to use this feature e Some phones cannot send phonebook entries if they are already connected to any system via Bluetooth and you may
56. develop irregular wear patterns These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type tires Rotation will increase tread life help to maintain mud snow and wet traction levels and contribute to a smooth quiet ride Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Sec tion 8 for the proper maintenance intervals The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being performed The suggested rotation method is the forward cross shown in the following diagram This rotation pattern does not apply to some direc tional tires that must not be reversed E 7e c EE 055703771 Tire Rotation 185 TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM TPMS The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recommended cold placard pres sure The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi 6 9 kPa for every 12 F 6 5 This means that when the outside temperature decreases the tire pressure will decrease Tire pressure should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure This is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after a three hour period The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded i
57. display while ACC is set Wo 10 F 03 5 1 Al 55 APH 8197267d ET The ACC SET screen will display once again if any ACC activity occurs which may include any of the following e Set speed change e Distance setting change e System cancel e Acquisition loss of Target Driver override System off Proximity warning e ACC warning The EVIC will return to the last display selected after five seconds of no ACC activity Display Warnings and Maintenance ACC Blinded Warning The ACC Blinded Warning will display when conditions temporarily limit system perfor mance This most often occurs at times of poor visibility such as in snow fog heavy rain or when driving into direct sunlight sunrise or sunset The ACC system may also become temporarily blinded due to obstructions such as dirt or ice In these cases the EVIC will display ACC Blinded 81becab7 NOTE If the ACC Blinded Warning is active Normal Fixed Speed Cruise Control is still avail able For additional information refer to Normal Fixed Speed Cruise Control Mode in this section If weather conditions are not a factor the driver should examine the sensor It may require cleaning or removal of an obstruction The sensor is located behind the grille slightly offset from the center of the grille eee ACC Sensor Location 103 To keep the ACC System operating properly it is important to note the following mai
58. down SET DECEL e Tap the stalk up ACCEL or down DE CEL to increase or decrease the set speed in 1 mph 1 6 km h increments respectively Hold for 5 mph 10 km h increments To Cancel The system will disable Normal cruise control without erasing the memory if e You softly tap or depress the brake pedal e You pull the speed control lever toward you CANCEL e The Electronic Stability Program Traction Control System ESP TCS activates To Resume Push the lever up and release RESUME ACCEL and then remove your foot from the accelerator pedal The EVIC will display the last set speed To Turn Off The system will turn off and erase the set speed in memory if e You push and release the ON OFF MODE button e You turn OFF the ignition e You switch off ESP If the cruise control system is turned off and reactivated the system will return to the Vehicle to vehicle adaptive distance control mode 107 PARKSENSE FRONT AND REAR PARK ASSIST Rear ParkSense Rear ParkSense system provides audio and visual indications of the distance between the rear fascia and the detected obstacle when backing up Refer to the Warning Section and NOTE Section for limitations of this system and recommendations Rear ParkSense will remember the last system state enabled or disabled from the last igni tion cycle when the ignition is changed to the RUN ON position Rear Park
59. driver seat will move about 2 4 in 60 mm rearward if the driver seat position is greater than or equal to 2 7 in 67 7 mm forward of the rear stop The seat will return to its previously set position when you place the ignition into the ACC or RUN position e When you remove the Key Fob from the ignition or change the ignition to OFF for vehicles equipped with Keyless Go the driver seat will move to a position 0 3 in 7 7 mm forward of the rear stop if the driver seat position is between 0 9 in and 2 7 in 86 22 7 mm and 67 7 mm forward of the rear stop The seat will return to its previously set position when you place the ignition into the ACC or RUN position e The Easy Entry Easy Exit feature is disabled when the driver seat position is less than 0 9 in 22 7 mm forward of the rear stop At this position there is no benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit or Easy Entry Each stored memory setting will have an asso ciated Easy Entry and Easy Exit position NOTE The Easy Entry Easy Exit feature can be enabled or disabled through the program mable features in the EVIC Refer to Auto matically Move Seat Back on Exit under Personal Settings Customer Program mable Features under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD Two latches must be released to open the hood 1 Pull the hood release lever located under the left sid
60. electrical system failure e When replacing a blown fuse it is important to use only a fuse having the correct am perage rating The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result in a dangerous electrical system overload If a properly rated fuse continues to blow it indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected Cavity Car Mini Description tridge Fuse Fuse 1 d 15 Amp Washer Motor Blue 25 Amp Powertrain Natural Control Module PCM 241 242 Cavity Car Mini Description Cavity Car Mini Description tridge Fuse tridge Fuse Fuse Fuse 3 25 Amp Ignition Run Start 12 40 Amp Radiator Fan Natural Green 4 25 Amp Alternator EGR 13 50 Amp Anti Lock Brake Natural Solenoid Red System ABS 5 15 Amp Diesel PCM If Pump Motor If Blue Equipped Equipped 6 25 Amp Ignition Coils 14 Natural Injectors Short 15 50 Amp Radiator Fan Runner Valve Red 7 25 Amp Headlamp 16 Natural Washer Relay If 17 Equipped 18 ES 8 30 Amp Starter 19 Green 20 9 21 10 30 Amp Windshield Wiper 22 x E Pink 11 30 Amp Anti Lock Brake Rear Power Distribution Center Pink System ABS There is also a power distribution center lo Valves If cated in the trunk under the spare tire access Eq
61. engine warms up NOTE High speed no load running of a cold en gine can result in excessive white smoke and poor engine performance No load en gine speeds should be kept under 1 200 RPM during the warm up period especially in cold ambient temperature conditions If temperatures are below 32 F 0 C operate the engine at moderate speeds for five minutes before full loads are applied Engine Idling In Cold Weather Avoid prolonged idling in ambient tempera tures below O F 18 C Long periods of idling may be harmful to your engine because com bustion chamber temperatures can drop so low that the fuel may not burn completely Incom plete combustion allows carbon and varnish to form on piston rings and injector nozzles Also the unburned fuel can enter the crankcase diluting the oil and causing rapid wear to the engine Stopping The Engine Before turning off your turbo diesel engine always allow the engine to return to normal idle speed and run for several seconds This as sures proper lubrication of the turbocharger This is particularly necessary after any period of hard driving Idle the engine a few minutes before routine shutdown After full load operation idle the engine three to five minutes before shutting it down This idle period will allow the lubricating oil and coolant to carry excess heat away from the combustion chamber bearings internal components and turbocharger This is espe cially i
62. equipped will display which memory position has been set NOTE e Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle in PARK but the vehicle must be in PARK to recall a memory profile e The Recall Memory with Remote Key Un lock feature can be enabled through the EVIC if equipped Refer to Personal Settings Customer Programmable Fea tures under Electronic Vehicle Informa tion Center EVIC in Section 4 Linking and Unlinking the Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter to Memory Your RKE transmitters can be programmed to recall one of two pre programmed memory profiles by pressing the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter To program your RKE transmitters perform the following 1 Remove the Key Fob from the ignition or change the ignition to OFF for vehicles equipped with Keyless 2 Select desired memory profile 1 or 2 3 Once the profile has been recalled press and release the SET S button on the memory switch then press and release the side of the rocker switch labeled 1 or 2 accordingly Memory Profile Set 1 or 2 will display in the instrument cluster on vehicles equipped with the EVIC 4 Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter within 10 seconds NOTE Your RKE transmitters can be unlinked to your memory settings by pressing the SET S button followed by the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter in Step 4 above Memory Position Recall NOTE e The veh
63. first item in that list on the second line e To Exit List mode without selecting a track press the same PRESET button again to go back to Play mode LIST button The LIST button will display the top level menu of the iPod Turn the TUNE control knob to list the top menu item you wish to select and press the TUNE control knob This will display the next sub menu list item on the iPod then you can follow the 145 same steps to go to the desired track in that list Not all iPod sub menu levels are avail able on this system e MUSIC TYPE button The MUSIC TYPE but ton is another shortcut button to the genre listing on your iPod CAUTION e Leaving the iPod or any supported de vice anywhere in the vehicle in extreme heat or cold can alter the operation or damage the device Follow the device manufacturer s guidelines e Placing items on the iPod or connections to the iPod in the vehicle can cause damage to the device and or to the connec tors WARNING Do not plug in or remove the iPod while driving Failure to follow this warning could result in an accident 146 KICKER HIGH PERFORMANCE SOUND SYSTEM WITH DRIVER SELECTABLE SURROUND DSS IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle is equipped with a state of the art audio amplifier that provides 5 1 channel sur round sound from any stereo audio source A new feature of the KICKER audio system offers the ability to choo
64. gps if equipped System Status and Personal Set tings 131 FUNCTION SELECT Button Press the FUNCTION SELECT but ton to accept a selection The FUNCTION SELECT button also functions as a remote sound sys tem control Refer to Remote Sound System Controls in this section SCROLL Button Press the SCROLL button to scroll A through Trip Functions uconnect v gps if equipped System Status Messages and Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features The SCROLL button also functions as a remote sound system control Refer to Remote Sound System Controls in this section AUDIO MODE Button Press the AUDIO MODE button to select the Compass Temp Audio screen Along with compass read ing and outside temperature this screen will display radio and me dia mode information depending 132 on which radio is in the vehicle Refer to Re mote Sound System Controls in this section Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Displays When the appropriate conditions exist the EVIC displays the following messages e Turn Signal On with a continuous warning chime if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile 1 6 km with either turn signal on e Left Front Turn Signal Light Out with a single chime e Left Rear Turn Signal Light Out with a single chime e Right Front Turn Signal Light Out with a single chime e Right Rear Turn Signal Light Out with a single chime e Memo
65. hills ACC may not detect a vehicle in your lane Depending on the speed vehicle load traffic conditions and the steep ness of the hills ACC performance may be limited 105 Lane Changing ACC will not detect a vehicle until it is com pletely in the lane in which you are traveling In the illustration shown ACC has not yet de tected the vehicle changing lanes and it will not until it may be too late to take action ACC will not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the lane There will not be sufficient distance to the lane changing vehicle Always be attentive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary 818e9563 106 Narrow Vehicles Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer edges of the lane or edging into the lane are not detected until they have moved fully into the lane There will not be sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead 818e9567 Stationary Objects and Vehicles ACC does not react to stationary objects and stationary vehicles For example ACC will not react in situations where the vehicle you are following exits your lane and the vehicle ahead is stopped in your lane Always be attentive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary General Information CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT Classification Specifications 21 C F R part 1040 10 amp 1040 11 DIN EN 60825 1 2003 IEC 60825 1 2001 Normal Fixed Speed Cruise Control Mode n addition to adaptive cruise control mode
66. ies enti Ae xc s 250 Speed Control Cruise Control 94 96 Speedometer 125 cria ee ok 159 Automatic Transmission 159 Cold Weather 161 Emergency Jump Starting 212 Engine Fails to Start 161 Starting and Operating 159 Starting Procedures 159 Steering Column Controls 89 POWER T 174 175 Tilt Column 93 Wheel Tilt 93 Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls 147 Storage ee eR 117 245 Storage Vehicle 152 245 Storing Your Vehicle 245 SUNROOF e244 AE ee as 114 Sunglasses Storage 114 Sunroof Maintenance 115 Supplemental Restraint System zT Pee en cia ee 33 Synthetic Engine Oil 228 Tachometer dee Rx 126 Telescoping Steering Column 93 Temperature Control Automatic ATC 148 Temperature Gauge Engine Coolant 5 asso a He x 128 206 Tether Anchor Child Restraint 45 Tilt Steering Column 93 Tip Start ue kc e Es 163 MIES rcl 50 181 Aging Life of Tires 184 Air Pressure 181 Changing ad 207 208 297 Compact Spare 182 Flat Changing 207 General Information 181 High Speed iaa s 182 Inflation Pressures 181 JACKING uuo decree Hob d
67. if the communication network re mains intact and the power remains intact depending on the nature of the event the ORC will determine whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform the follow ing functions e Cut off fuel to the engine e Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or until the ignition key is turned off e Turn on the interior lights which remain on as long as the battery has power until the ignition key is removed or the ignition switch is changed to OFF using the Keyless Go Start Stop button Unlock the doors automatically If a Deployment Occurs The airbags are designed to deflate immedi ately after deployment NOTE Front and or side airbags will not deploy in all collisions This does not mean some thing is wrong with the airbag system If you do have a collision which deploys the airbags any or all of the following may occur e The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abrasions and or skin reddening to the driver and front passenger as the air bags deploy and unfold The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet or gymna sium floor They are not caused by contact with chemicals They are not permanent and normally heal quickly However if you haven t healed significantly within a few days or if you have any blistering see your doctor immediately e As the airbags deflate you may see some smoke like p
68. into the sheet metal note correct orientation of lettering on lens 7 Rotate the side repeater lamp in place until the left side engages you will hear a light click Rear Tail Stop Fog Lamp Turn Signal and Backup Lamps 1 Open the trunk 2 Remove two fasteners from the back of the tail lamp assembly 812c4b54 3 Pull back the trunk liner 4 Remove the remaining fastener from the back of the tail lamp assembly 5 Push the electrical connector locking tab to the side 6 Disconnect the electrical connector 7 Pull the tail lamp assembly clear from the vehicle to access the bulbs Turn the bulb sockets counterclockwise to remove 8 Turn the appropriate bulb and socket as sembly counterclockwise to remove it from the tail lamp assembly 818db1af 1 Tail Stop Lamp Bulb 818db1b4 2 Rear Fog Lamp Bulb 247 818db1b9 3 Turn Signal Lamp Bulb 818db1c9 4 Backup Lamp Bulb 248 9 Disconnect the bulb from the socket assem bly and install the replacement bulb 10 Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly into the tail lamp assembly and then turn it clockwise 11 Reinstall the tail lamp assembly fasteners electrical connector and trunk liner 12 Close the trunk License Lamp 4 Remove the screws securing the lamp to the rear fascia 2 Remove the bulb and socket assembly 3 Disconnect the bulb from the socket assem bly and inst
69. is designed to lock during very sudden stops or impacts This feature allows the shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under normal conditions However in a collision the belt will lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out WARNING e It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts e Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly e Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is danger ous Seat belts are designed to go around the large bones of your body These are the strongest parts of your body and can take the forces of a collision best e Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make your injuries in a collision much worse You might suffer internal injuries or you could even slide out of part of the belt Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe too Continued WARNING Continued e Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt People belted together can crash into one another in an accident hurting one another badly Never use a lap shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one person no matter what their size Lap Shoulder
70. it downward Child Lock Control 3 Repeat Steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door NOTE After disengaging the Child Protection Door Lock system always test the door from the inside to make certain it is in the desired position WINDOWS Power Windows The window controls on the driver s door con trol all the door windows Power Window Switches There are single window controls on each pas senger door trim panel which operate the passenger door windows The window controls will operate only when the ignition switch is in the ACC or RUN position NOTE e For vehicles not equipped with the Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC the power window switches will remain active for 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position Open ing either front door will cancel this feature e For vehicles equipped with the EVIC the power window switches will remain active for up to 60 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position Opening either front door will cancel this feature The time is programmable Refer to Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit under Personal Settings Cus tomer Programmable Features in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual WARNING Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in the ignition switch or leave a vehicle with Keyless Go in the ACC or RUN position Occupan
71. km or 3 months if using your vehicle under any of the following severe duty conditions e Stop and go driving e Driving in dusty conditions e Short trips of less than 10 miles 16 km e Trailer towing e Taxi police or delivery service commercial service e Off road or desert operation 255 7 500 Miles 12 000 km or 6 Months Maintenance Service Schedule J Change the engine oil and engine oil filter t 2 Rotate tires Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 15 000 Miles 24 000 km or 12 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter tT Rotate tires If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Replace the air conditioning filter if equipped Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the CV joints Perform the first inspection at 15 000 miles 24 000 km or 12 months Inspect exhaust system Perform the first inspection at 15 000 miles 24 000 km or 12 months Inspect the rear axle fluid Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 256 22 500 Miles 36 000 km or 30 000 Miles 48 000 km or 37 500 Miles 60 000 km or 18 Months Maintenance Service 24 Months Maintenance Service 30 Months Mai
72. manually WARNING There is no anti pinch protection when the window is almost closed Be sure to clear all objects from the window before closing Window Lockout Switch The window lockout switch on the driver s door trim panel allows you to disable the window controls on the passenger doors To disable the window controls press and release the window lockout button setting it in the DOWN position 26 To enable the window controls press and re lease the window lockout button again setting it in the UP position Window Lockout Switch Reset Anytime the vehicle battery is disconnected or goes dead the AUTO up function will be dis abled To reactivate the AUTO up feature per form the following procedure after vehicle power is restored 1 Pull the window switch up to close window completely and continue to hold the switch up for an additional two seconds after the window is closed Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the per ception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if equipped in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open then open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting If the buffeting occurs with the sun roof open then adjust the sunroof opening
73. mode control knob on the right to AUTO and place the blower control knob on the left to either LO AUTO or HI AUTO The LO AUTO position should be used for front seat occupants only The HI AUTO position should be used when more airflow is desired or when rear seat occupants are present Then dial in the temperature you would like the system to maintain by rotating the driver or passenger temperature control knob Once the comfort level is selected the system will maintain that level automatically using the heating system Should the desired comfort level require air conditioning the system will automatically make the adjustment You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to function auto matically Selecting the OFF position on the fan control stops the system completely and closes the outside air intake 72 F 22 C is the recommended setting for maximum comfort for the average person how ever this may vary NOTE The temperature setting can be adjusted at any time without affecting automatic opera tion Air conditioning in this system is auto x matic Pressing the air conditioning control button while in AUTO mode will cause the indicator in the control but ton to flash three times and then turn off This indicates that the system is in AUTO mode and requesting the air conditioning is not neces sary The system will automatically con trol recirculation However press ing
74. movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat s path Power Reclining Seats The recline control is used to adjust the position of the seatback To adjust the seatback for ward move the control toward the front of the vehicle To move the seatback rearward move the control toward the rear of the vehicle The recliner control is located on the outboard side of the seat Power Seat Recline Switch WARNING Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and be seriously or even fatally injured Use the recliner only when the vehicle is parked Lumbar Support This feature allows you to increase or decrease the amount of lumbar support Turn the control lever forward to increase and rearward to de crease the desired amount of lumbar support Lumbar Support Control Lever Head Restraints Head restraints can reduce the risk of injury in the event of a rear impact The head restraint should be adjusted so the top of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear To raise the head restraint pull upward on the head restraint To lower the head restraint press the large button located on the base of the head restraint and push downward on the head restraint Adjustable Head Restraints NOTE The rear head restraints are not adjustable To remove the head restraint
75. or ice around the wheels or wheel housings 4 Using tire chains on the vehicle 5 Using wheels tires not equipped with TPM sensors Vehicles with Full Size Spare 1 The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly has a TPM sensor that can be moni tored by the TPMS 2 If you install the full size spare in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit upon the next ignition Switch cycle a chime will sound and the TPM Telltale Light will turn ON In addition the EVIC will display a low pressure message and a graphic showing the low tire pressure value flashing 3 After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h the TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires Vehicles with Compact Spare 1 The compact spare tire does not have a TPM sensor Therefore the TPMS will not moni tor the pressure in the compact spare tire 2 If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit upon the next igni tion switch cycle the TPM Telltale Light will remain ON and a chime will sound In addition the graphic in the EVIC will still display a flashing pressure value 3 After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then rem
76. out of position e f the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck move the child closer to the center of the vehicle Never allow a child to put the shoul der belt under an arm or behind their back WARNING e Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint It could come loose in a collision The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the manufac turer s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint e A rearward facing child restraint should only be used in a rear seat A rearward facing child restraint in the front seat may be struck by a deploying passenger airbag which may cause severe or fatal injury to the infant Here are some tips on getting the most out of your child restraint e Before buying any restraint system make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Standards We also recommend that you make sure that you can install the child restraint in the vehicle where you will use it before you buy it e The restraint must be appropriate for your child s weight and height Check the label on the restraint for weight and height limits e Carefully follow the instructions that come with the restraint If you install the restraint improperly it may not work when you need it e Buckle the child into the seat according to the child restraint manufacturer s directions e When your child restraint is not in us
77. response during normal operation in the DRIVE position After the transmission cools down it will return to normal operation Key Ignition Park Interlock This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Interlock which requires the shift lever to be placed in PARK prior to rotating the key fob to the LOCK position The key fob can only be removed from the ignition when the ignition is in the LOCK position and once removed the shift lever is locked in PARK 165 Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmis sion Shift Interlock System BTSI that holds the shift lever in the PARK position when the igni tion switch is in the LOCK position OFF posi tion with Keyless Go To move the shift lever out of the PARK position the ignition switch must be turned to the ON or START position engine running or not and the brake pedal must be pressed Brake Transmission Interlock Manual Override There is an override for the BTSI that allows you to move the shift lever out of the PARK position if an electrical system malfunction occurs i e dead battery To access the override remove the rubber tray from the storage bin located to the right of the shift lever The override access port is at the top of the bin to the right of the shift lever gate 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ACC or ON position RUN position with Keyless Go with out starting the engine 2 Firmly set the pa
78. six months whichever comes first Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator message after completing the sched uled oil change If a scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than your autho rized dealer the message can be reset by referring to the steps described under Oil Change Required under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 or un der Odometer Trip Odometer under Instru ment Cluster Descriptions in Section 4 At Each Stop for Fuel e Check the engine oil level Refer to Engine Oil under Maintenance Procedures in Section 7 e Check the windshield washer solvent and add if required Once a Month e Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or damage e Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals as required e Check the fluid levels of the coolant reser voir brake master cylinder and power steer ing add as needed e Check all lights and other electrical items for correct operation At Each Oil Change e Change the engine oil filter e Inspect the brake hoses and lines CAUTION Failure to perform the required maintenance items may result in damage to the vehicle Required Maintenance Intervals Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following pages for the required maintenance intervals Severe Duty Conditions t Change the engine oil and engine oil filter at every 3 000 miles 5 000
79. size and shape giving a false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle OVERHEAD CONSOLE The overhead console contains courtesy reading lights storage for sunglasses and a power sunroof switch if equipped 81941159 Overhead Console Courtesy Reading Lights At the forward end of the console are two courtesy reading lights Press the lens to turn on the light Press it a second time to turn off the light These lights also turn on when a door is opened when the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter is pressed or when the dimmer control is turned fully upward past the second detent 113 Sunglasses Storage At the rear of the console a compartment is provided for the storage of a pair of sun glasses The storage compartment access is a push push design Push on the raised bar on the compartment door to open Push on the raised bar to close POWER SUNROOF IF EQUIPPED The power sunroof switch is located between the sun visors on the overhead console Power Sunroof Controls 114 WARNING e Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in the ignition switch Occupants par ticularly unattended children can become entrapped by the power sunroof while op erating the power sunroof switch Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death e In an accident there is a greater risk of being thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof You cou
80. the five available gears To engage AutoStick simply move the shift lever to the right or left D D while in the DRIVE position The gear position will display in the instrument cluster In the AutoStick mode the transmis sion will shift uo and down when left or right D D is manually selected by the driver It will remain in the selected gear until another upshift or downshift is chosen The transmission will automatically downshift as the vehicle slows to a stop to prevent engine lugging and will display the current gear Tapping the shift lever to the D position at a stop will allow starting in second gear After a stop the driver should manually upshift D the transmission as the vehicle is accelerated To disengage AutoStick mode hold the shift lever to the right D for a few seconds You can shift in or out of the AutoStick mode at any time without taking your foot off the accelerator pedal WARNING Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a slippery surface The drive wheels could lose their grip and the vehicle could skid causing an accident or personal injury DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES Acceleration Rapid acceleration on snow covered wet or other slippery surfaces may cause the rear wheels to pull erratically to the right or left This phenomenon occurs when there is a difference in the surface traction under the rear driving wheels WARNING Rapid acceleration
81. the recirculation control button will temporarily put the system in Recirculation mode 10 minutes This can be used when outside conditions such as smoke odors dust or high humidity are present Activating recirculation will cause the indicator in the control button to illuminate After 10 minutes the system will return to normal AUTO mode function and the indicator will turn off NOTE e The surface of the climate control panel and the top center of the instrument panel should be kept free of debris due to the q location of the climate control sensors Mud on the windshield may also cause poor operation of this system On vehicles equipped with diesel en gines the blower fan will initially operate at a minimum speed to provide you with maximum comfort in the fan Automatic mode during cold weather start ups Then as the engine warms up the fan will gradually increase its speed This feature will avoid blowing cold air to the driver and or passengers which increases com fort level However the fan will engage immediately by adjusting the blower con trol knob left knob to a position other than HI AUTO or LO AUTO Extended use of recirculation may cause the windows to fog If the interior of the windows begin to fog press the recircu lation button to return to outside air Some temp humidity conditions will cause captured interior air to condense on windows and hamper visibility For this reason the sy
82. the system adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be done by an experienced technician Refrigerant Recovery and Recycling R 134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydro fluorocarbon HFC that is endorsed by the Envi ronmental Protection Agency and is an ozone saving product However the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be per formed by authorized dealers or other service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment NOTE Use only manufacturer approved A C sys tem sealers stop leak products seal condi tioners compressor oil and refrigerants A C Air Filter The filter is located in the fresh air inlet under the hood behind a removable panel in the cowl on the passenger side of the vehicle next to the windshield wipers When installing a new filter ensure its proper orientation To replace the filter remove the access door in the cowl screen by pressing the retaining clips Slide the lid on the filter adapter forward and down and remove the used filter Install the new filter with arrows pointing in the direction of airflow which is toward the rear of the vehicle text and arrows on the filter indicate this Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Sec tion 8 for the proper maintenance intervals Body Lubrication Locks and all body pivot points including such items as seat tracks door hinge pivot points and rollers liftgate tailgate
83. the wheel cover with the valve stem on the wheel Install the cover by 212 hand snapping the cover over the two lug nuts Do not use a hammer or excessive force to install the cover 4 Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped end of the nut toward the wheel Lightly tighten the lug nuts To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle is lowered to the ground 5 Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack handle counterclockwise 6 Finish tightening the lug nuts Push down on the wrench while tightening for increased lever age Alternate lug nuts until each nut has been tightened twice The correct tightness of each lug nut is 100 ft lb 135 Nm If in doubt about the correct tightness have them checked with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or at a service station 7 For vehicles equipped with center caps install the center cap by hand Do not use a hammer or excessive force to install the center cap 8 Stow the jack tools and spare tire Make sure the base of the jack faces the rear of the vehicle before tightening down the fastener WARNING A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a colli sion or hard stop could endanger the occu pants of the vehicle Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places provided JUMP STARTING PROCEDURES Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started Vehic
84. to minimize the buffeting TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE The trunk lid can be released from inside the vehicle by pressing the TRUNK RELEASE but ton located on the instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel NOTE The transmission must be in PARK before the button will operate The trunk lid can be released from outside the vehicle by pressing the TRUNK button on the Remote Key less Entry RKE transmitter twice within five sec 81ac2fd7 onds Trunk Release Button With the ignition switch in the RUN position the Trunk Open symbol will display in the instru ment cluster indicating that the trunk is open The odometer display will reappear once the trunk is closed With the ignition switch in the OFF position or the key removed from the ignition switch the Trunk Open symbol will display until the trunk is closed Refer to Passive Entry If Equipped under Door Locks in this section for more informa tion on trunk operation with the Passive Entry feature TRUNK SAFETY WARNING WARNING Do not allow children to have access to the trunk either by climbing into the trunk from outside or through the inside of the vehicle Always close the trunk lid when your vehicle is unattended Once in the trunk young children may not be able to escape even if they entered through the rear seat If trapped in the trunk children can die from suffocation or heat stroke Trunk Emergency Release
85. to 70 milliseconds This is about half of the time it takes to blink your eyes The bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passen ger The driver front airbag gas is vented through the vent holes in the sides of the airbag The passenger front airbag gas is vented through the vent holes in the sides of the airbag In this way the airbags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle 37 Supplemental Side Seat Airbag Inflator Units If Equipped The Side Impact SRS Seat Mounted Supple mental Side Seat Airbags are designed to activate only in certain side collisions The ORC determines if a side collision requires the side airbags to inflate based on the severity and type of collision The ORC monitors the readiness of the elec tronic parts of the system whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON positions These include all of the items previously mentioned Based on the severity and type of collision the side airbag inflator on the crash side of the vehicle may be triggered releasing a quantity of non toxic gas The inflating side airbag exits through the seat seam into the space between the occupant and the door The side airbags fully inflate in about 10 milliseconds The side airbag moves at a very high speed and with such a high force that it could injure you if you are not seated properly or if items are posi tioned in the area where the side airbag in flates
86. touch them up immediately The cost of such repairs is considered the re sponsibility of the owner If your vehicle is damaged due to an acci dent or similar cause which destroys the paint and protective coating have your ve hicle repaired as soon as possible The cost of such repairs is considered the responsi bility of the owner If you carry special cargo such as chemi cals fertilizers de icer salt etc be sure that such materials are well packaged and sealed If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads consider mud or stone shields behind each wheel e Use MOPAR Touch Up Paint or equivalent on scratches as soon as possible Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle Wheel and Wheel Trim Care All wheels and wheel trim especially aluminum and chrome plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion To remove heavy soil and or exces sive brake dust use MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or equivalent or select a nonabrasive non acidic cleaner Do not use scouring pads steel wool a bristle brush or metal polishes Only MO PAR or equivalent is recommended Do not use oven cleaner Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheels protective finish Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure If Equipped Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the follow ing manner e Remove as much of the st
87. vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry and the EVIC is programmed to Unlock All Doors ist Press all doors will unlock no matter which Passive Entry equipped door handle is grasped If Driver Door 1st Press is programmed only the driver s door will un lock when the driver s door is grasped With Passive Entry if Driver Door 1st Press is programmed touching the handle more than once will only result in the driver s door opening You have to touch a passenger Passive Entry equipped door handle to un lock all doors passively when Driver s Door Only is programmed in the EVIC Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock If Equipped When ON is selected you can use your RKE transmitter to recall one of two pre programmed memory profiles Each memory profile contains desired position settings for the driver seat side mirror adjustable pedals if equipped power tilt and telescopic steering column if equipped and a set of desired radio station presets When OFF is selected only the MEMORY switch on the driver s door trim panel will recall memory profiles To make your selec tion press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until ON or OFF appears Refer to Driver Memory Seat in Section 3 Rain Sensing Intermittent Wipers If Equipped When ON is selected the system will automati cally activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture on the windshield To make your se lection press
88. ven 228 250 Filter Disposal 228 Identification Logo 227 Materials Added to 228 Recommendation 227 249 Synthetic o o o o ooo 228 VISCOSIY isos 227 228 249 Oil Filter Change 228 Oil Filter Selection 228 Onboard Diagnostic System 225 Operating Precautions 225 Operator Manual Owner s Manual 5 Outside Rearview Mirrors 57 Overdrive 168 Overhead Console 113 Overheating Engine 128 206 Owner s Manual Operator Manual 5 295 Care 238 Panic Alarmi osaa hx ea 18 Park Sense System Rear 108 Parking Brake o reis rr 175 Passing light cotizar as 89 Passive ENY x se do e 22 Pedals Adjustable 94 Personal Settings 140 POLS oed Go Ru hae x ars 48 Phone Cellular 59 Phone Hands Free uconnect 59 Power Deck Lid Release 26 Distribution Center Fuses 241 242 DDoorbo6KS 229 ae und 20 MINOIS 8 a Bee oe 58 Outlet Auxiliary Electrical Outlet 115 SEAS si ie Packs de pm e SADE we ndm 80 Steering 0 174 175 SUMOO Re 114 Tilt Telescoping Steering Column 93 Windows 200 25 Power Steering Fluid 252 Pregnant Women and Seat Belts 33 Preparation for Jacking 208 Pr
89. will cancel this feature The time is programmable Refer to Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit under Personal Settings Customer Program mable Features under Electronic Vehicle In formation Center EVIC in Section 4 Sunroof Fully Closed Press the switch forward and release to ensure that the sunroof is fully closed ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS There are two 12 Volt 13 Amp electrical power outlets on this vehicle Both of the power outlets are protected by a fuse Insert cigar lighter or accessory plug into the power outlets for use to ensure proper opera tion NOTE e To ensure proper operation a MOPAR knob and element must be used Do exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts 13 Amps at 12 Volts If the 160 Watt 13 Amp power rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the system will need to be replaced 115 The 12 Volt power outlet next to the ash receiver Items plugged into this outlet may discharge tray has power available only when the ignition the battery and or prevent the engine from WARNING Continued is placed in the ACC or RUN position starting If this outlet is mishandled it may cause an p electric shock and failure CAUTION e Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power from the vehicle s battery even when not in use i e cellular phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to
90. will play the current con firmation prompt status and you will be given the choice to change it Phone and Network Status Indicators If available on the radio and or on a premium display such as the instrument panel cluster and supported by your cellular phone the uconnect phone will provide notification to inform you of your phone and network status when you are attempting to make a phone call using uconnect phone The status is given for roaming network signal strength phone bat tery strength etc Dialing Using the Cellular Phone Keypad You can dial a phone number with your cellular phone keypad and still use the uconnect phone while dialing via the cellular phone keypad the user must exercise caution and take precautionary safety measures By dial ing a number with your paired Bluetooth cel lular phone the audio will be played through your vehicle s audio system The uconnect phone will work the same as if you dial the number using voice recognition NOTE Certain brands of cellular phones do not send the dial ring to the uconnect phone to play it on the vehicle audio system so you will not hear it Under this situation after successfully dialing a number the user may feel that the call did not go through even though the call is in progress Once your call is answered you will hear the audio Mute Un Mute Mute Off When you mute the uconnect phone you will still be able to hear the con
91. 0 km or 90 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter t Rotate tires Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals replace if necessary O O O C Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 262 120 000 Miles 192 000 km or 96 Months Maintenance Service Schedule CO C Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires Replace the engine air cleaner filter Replace the spark plugs 5 7L Engine Replace the air conditioning filter if equipped Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Inspect the rear axle fluid Replace the accessory drive belt s 2 7L 3 5L and 5 7L Engines Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 127 500 Miles 204 000 km or 102 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter t J Rotate tires Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 263 135 000 Miles 216 000 km or 108 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J Ro
92. 140753 287 288 About Your Brakes 175 ABS Anti Lock Brake System 176 Adaptive Cruise Control Cruise Control 96 Adding Engine Coolant Antifreeze 234 Adding Fuel eR ER 194 Adding Washer Fluid 231 Additives Fuel 193 Adjustable Pedals 94 Air Cleaner Engine Engine Air Cleaner Filter 228 Air Conditioner Maintenance 230 Air Conditioning Filter 152 230 Air Conditioning Operating Tips 153 Air Conditioning Refrigerant 230 Air Conditioning System 148 230 Air Pressure Tires 129 181 ADE ata ert tle dab 33 38 Airbag Deployment 39 Airbag Light 33 37 40 50 127 Airbag Maintenance 39 Airbag Side 34 36 38 Airbag Window Side Curtain 34 36 38 Alarm suu ko 2246 18 Alarm Security Alarm 129 Alarm System Security Alarm T5 Alterations Modifications Vehicle 7 290 Antifreeze Engine Coolant 234 249 Disposal iz debes ee Den do es 235 Anti Lock Brake System ABS 176 178 Anti Lock Warning Light 126 Appearance Care 238 Auto Down Power Windows 25 Auto Unlock Doors 21 Auto Up Power Windows 25 Automatic Dimming Mirror 57 Automatic Door Locks 21 Automatic Headligh
93. 2 15 SDARS Video If p Occupant Re Equipped Vehicle Red straint Controller 30 10 Amp Door Modules Information Mod ORC Red Power Mirrors ule If Equipped Cav Car Mini Description ity tridge Fuse Fuse 39 10 Amp Heated Mirrors If Red Equipped 40 5 Auto Inside Rear Orange view Mirror If Equipped Heated Seats If Equipped Switch Bank 41 15 Amp AWD Module If Blue Equipped 42 30 Amp Front Blower Pink Motor 43 30 Amp Rear Window Pink Defroster 44 20 Amp Amplifier If Blue Equipped Sunroof If Equipped Cavities 11 12 and 13 contain self resetting fuses circuit breakers that are only service able by an authorized dealer The cluster the driver seat switch if equipped and the memory module if equipped are fused by the 25 Amp circuit breaker in Cavity 11 The pas senger seat switch if equipped is fused by the 25 Amp circuit breaker in Cavity 12 The door modules the driver power window switch and the passenger power window switch are fused by the 25 Amp circuit breaker in Cavity 13 If you experience temporary or permanent loss of these systems see your authorized dealer for service VEHICLE STORAGE If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21 days you may want to take these steps to protect your battery e Disconnect the negative cable from the bat tery e Any
94. 27 7W Rear FogLamp 3157P27 7W Center High Mount Stop Lamp CHMSL LED Serviced at Authorized Dealer License suom tmc Re W5W 246 BULB REPLACEMENT Low Beam Headlamp High Beam Headlamp Park Turn Signal Lamp and Front Position Lamp High Intensity Discharge Headlamps HID The headlamps are a type of high voltage discharge tube High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the headlamp switch OFF and the key fob removed Because of this you should not attempt to service a headlamp bulb yourself If a headlamp bulb fails take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for service WARNING A transient high tension occurs at the bulb sockets of High Intensity Discharge HID headlamps when the headlamp switch is turned ON It may cause serious electrical shock or electrocution if not serviced properly See your authorized dealer for service NOTE On vehicles equipped with High Intensity Discharge Headlamps HID when the head lamps are turned on there is a blue hue to the lamps This diminishes and becomes more white after approximately 10 seconds as the system charges Side Repeater Lamps 1 Push the side repeater lamp to the left and then disengage it by rotating it out of the metal around its left edge Remove the side repeater lamp Rotate the socket out Remove the bulb ak WwW nm Replace the bulb 6 Engage the right hook of side repeater lamp
95. 41 Rear Wheel Drive RWD to All Wheel Drive AWD When the vehicle automatically transitions from AWD to RWD the EVIC will display the following message for five seconds 041005942 All Wheel Drive AWD to Rear Wheel Drive RWD Refer to All Wheel Drive If Equipped in Section 5 for more information on the All Wheel Drive AWD system Keyless Go Display If Equipped When the ENGINE START STOP button is pressed to change ignition switch positions the Keyless Go icon momentarily appears in the EVIC display showing the new ignition switch position ACC OFF 29 RUN 041008156 Keyless Go Display The round symbol in the middle rotates to point at the new ignition switch position If desired the ignition switch position graphic can be set to be constantly visible by pressing the EVIC MENU button until the display appears Refer to Keyless Go in Section 5 for more information NOTE Under certain conditions the display may be superseded by another display of higher priority But when the ignition switch posi tion is changed the display always re appears Driver Selectable Surround Sound DSS If Equipped Press and release the MENU button until Sur round Sound displays in the EVIC The EVIC provides information on the current surround mode e Stereo e Video Surround e Audio Surround While in the Surround Sound menu press the FUNCTION SELECT button to change surround mode
96. ACC is ON Refer to Electronic Speed Con trol or Adaptive Cruise Control in Section 3 for more information 3 Low Fuel Indicator Light a This light will turn on and a single chime will sound when the fuel lever drops to approximately 1 8 tank Refer to Add ing Fuel in Section 5 for more informa tion 4 Front Fog Light Indicator This indicator will illuminate when the FO front fog lights are on Refer to Fog Lights under Lights in Section 3 for more information 5 Turn Signal Indicator The arrow wil flash with the exterior turn signal when the turn signal lever is oper ated Refer to Multifunction Lever un der Lights in Section 3 for more information NOTE e A continuous chime will sound if the ve hicle is driven more than 1 mile 1 6 km with either turn signal on e Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either indicator flashes at a rapid rate 6 Speedometer Indicates vehicle speed 7 Odometer Trip Odometer Display Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Display The odometer shows the total distance the vehicle has been driven The trip odometer shows individual trip mileage Refer to Trip Odometer Button for additional information Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap is loose improperly installed or damaged a Check Gascap mes sage will display in the odometer display
97. CC is set you can increase the set speed by lifting and holding the lever up RES ACCEL If the lever is continually held the set Speed will continue to increase in 5 mph 10 km h increments until the lever is released The increase in set speed is reflected in the EVIC display 100 Tapping the lever up once will result in a 1 mph 1 6 km h increase in set speed Each subse quent tap of the lever results in an increase of 1 mph 1 6 km h While ACC is set the set speed can be de creased by pushing the lever down and hold ing SET DECEL If the lever is continually held the set speed will continue to decrease in 5 mph 10 km h increments until the lever is released The decrease in set speed is re flected in the EVIC display Tapping the lever down once will result in a 1 mph 1 6 km h decrease in set speed Each subsequent tap of the lever results in a de crease of 1 mph 1 6 km h NOTE e When you use the lever to decelerate if the engine s braking power does not slow the vehicle sufficiently to reach the set speed the brake system will automati cally slow the vehicle e The ACC system maintains set speed when driving up hill and down hill How ever a slight speed change on moderate hills is normal In addition downshifting may occur while climbing uphill or de scending downhill This is normal opera tion and necessary to maintain set speed Setting the Following Distance in ACC The spe
98. Cruise Control ACC is a conve nience system It is not a substitute for active driving involvement It is always the driver s responsibility to be attentive of road traffic and weather conditions ve hicle speed distance to the vehicle ahead and most importantly brake operation to ensure safe operation of the vehicle under all road conditions Your complete attention is always required while driving to maintain safe control of your vehicle Failure to fol low these warnings can result in an acci dent or serious personal injury The ACC system Does not react to pedestrians oncoming vehicles and stationary objects i e a stopped vehicle in a traffic jam or a dis abled vehicle Does not predict the lane curvature or the movement of preceding vehicles and will not compensate for such changes WARNING Continued e Cannot take street traffic and weather conditions into account and may be limited upon adverse sight distance conditions e Does not always fully recognize complex driving conditions which can result in wrong or missing distance warnings e May not detect a vehicle ahead when strong light for example sunrise or sunset is directly shining on the front of the vehicle e Can only apply a maximum of 25 of the vehicle s braking capability and will not bring the vehicle to a complete stop WARNING You should switch off the ACC system e When driving in fog heavy rain heavy snow sleet hea
99. DRUSI penn RU a awa ca A 289 INTRODUCTION Congratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group LLC vehicle Be assured that it repre sents precision workmanship distinctive styl ing and high quality all essentials that are traditional to our vehicles Before you start to drive this vehicle read this Owner s Manual and all the supplements Be sure you are familiar with all vehicle controls particularly those used for braking steering and transmission shifting Learn how your ve hicle handles on different road surfaces Your driving skills will improve with experience but as in driving any vehicle take it easy as you begin Always observe local laws wherever you drive NOTE After you read the manual it should be stored in the vehicle for convenient refer ence and remain with the vehicle when sold so that the new owner will be aware of all safety warnings Failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or an accident Operating this vehicle at excessive speeds or while intoxicated may result in loss of control collision with other vehicles or objects going off the road or overturning any of which may lead to serious injury or death Also failure to use seat belts subjects the driver and passen gers to a greater risk of injury or death To keep your vehicle running at its best have your vehicle serviced at recommended inter vals by an authorized dealer who has the qualified
100. E 3 13 4 40 Amp Integrated Power 14 10 Amp AC Heater Control Green Module IPM Red Cluster Security 5 30 Amp Heated Seats If Module If Pink Equipped Equipped 6 20 Amp Fuel Pump Yellow 243 244 Steering Control Module SCM Cav Car Mini Description Cav Car Mini Description Cav Car Mini Description ity tridge Fuse ity tridge Fuse ity tridge Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse 15 20 Amp Trailer Tow Brake 28 10 Amp Ignition Run AC 31 m Yellow Module If Red Heater Control 32 Equipped Headlights Park 33 16 Assist If 34 17 20 Amp Cluster Equipped Tire 35 5 Antenna Module Yellow Pressure Monitor Orange If Equipped Power 18 20 Amp Selectable Power ing If Equipped Mirrors Rain Sen Yellow Outlet Occupant Restraint sor If Equipped 19 10 Amp Stop Lights Coitraller ORO 36 20 Amp Hands Free Phone Red 29 5 Amp Adaptive Cruise Yellow If Equipped 20 Z Orange Control ACC If Video Monitor If 21 Equipped Cluster Equipped Radio Electronic Stability gt 22 Program ESP If 37 15 Amp Transmission 23 Equipped Plug 24 Powertrain Control 38 10 Amp Analog Clock 088 n Module PCM o 28
101. If you deactivated the Electronic Speed Control without erasing the set speed from memory and your vehicle speed is above 20 mph 32 km h you can resume the previous set speed To do so push the lever upward to RES ACCEL and release Then remove your foot from the accelerator pedal 95 To Vary the Speed Setting When the Electronic Speed Control is set you can increase speed by pushing up and holding the RES ACCEL lever If the lever is continually held in the RES ACCEL position the set speed will continue to increase until the lever is re leased then the new set speed will be estab lished Tapping the lever to RES ACCEL once will result in a 1 mph 1 6 km h speed increase Each time the lever is tapped speed increases so tapping the lever three times will increase speed by 3 mph 4 8 km h etc To decrease speed while Electronic Speed Control is set push down and hold the lever in SET DECEL Release the lever when the de sired speed is reached and a new set speed will be established Tapping the lever to SET DECEL once will result in a 1 mph 1 6 km h speed decrease Each time the lever is tapped speed decreases To Accelerate For Passing Press the accelerator as you would normally When the pedal is released the vehicle will return to the set speed 96 Using Electronic Speed Control on Hills NOTE The Electronic Speed Control system main tains speed up and down hills A slight speed change on mode
102. L message turns off The compass will now function normally Compass Variance Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic North and Geographic North To compensate for the differences the variance should be set for the zone where the vehicle is driven per the zone map Once properly set the compass will automatically compensate for the differences and provide the most accurate compass heading NOTE Keep magnetic materials away from the top of the instrument panel such as iPod s Cell Phones Laptops and Radar Detectors This is where the compass module is located and it can cause interference with the com pass sensor and it may give false readings 12 5 low 6 1 1 42 8 1211160 CL 3 jo NE AS v N 14 gt y 5 1 4 3 80bbc346 Compass Variance Map 139 1 Turn the ignition switch ON 2 Press and hold the HOME button for ap proximately two seconds 3 Press the SCROLL button until Compass Variance message and the last variance zone number displays in the EVIC 4 Press and release FUNCTION SELECT but ton until the proper variance zone is selected according to the map 5 Press and release the HOME button to exit uconnect gps If Equipped uconnect gps Display Control Press and release the MENU button until Navi gation displays in the EVIC When the Navigation Syste
103. LE CENTERLINE E F WHEEL CENTERLINE 813a949e Overhang Dimensions Trailer Tow Hitch Attaching Points And 2 10 ft 638 9 mm 2 45 ft 746 1 mm A B 2 73 ft 831 1 D 3 81 ft 1161 5 mm maximum overhang E 1 76 ft 535 3 mm F 1 71 ft 520 3 mm RECREATIONAL TOWING BEHIND MOTORHOME ETC Two Wheel Drive and All Wheel Drive Recreational towing with all four wheels on the ground is allowed ONLY if the rear driveshaft is removed and the transmission is in NEUTRAL for both RWD and AWD vehicles WARNING If the driveshaft is removed the vehicle can roll even if the transmission is in PARK which could cause serious injury or death The parking brake must be firmly engaged and the wheels chocked during driveshaft removal and installation The parking brake must remain engaged unless the vehicle is securely and properly connected to the tow vehicle or the driveshaft is completely reinstalled See your authorized dealer for proper driveshaft removal and reinstallation procedures including flange orientation alignment use of thread locking compound proper bolt torque specifications etc CAUTION Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission and or transfer case damage Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty 203 204 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
104. LECTRONIC INDICATOR LIGHT OIL TEMP TEMPERATURE RESTRAINT SYSTEM AIRBAG OFF TOP DOWN TOP UP MANUAL 150 CONDITIONER STABILITY CONTROL OFF 010507683 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS This Owners Manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures that could result in an accident or bodily injury It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures that could re sult in damage to your vehicle If you do not read this entire manual you may miss impor tant information Observe all Warnings and Cautions VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER The vehicle identification number VIN is on the left front corner of the instrument panel and on the right front strut tower inside the engine compartment The VIN is also printed on a label that is affixed to the left rear C Pillar The VIN is visible from outside of the vehicle through the windshield 81519585 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS ALTERATIONS WARNING Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may lead to an accident resulting in serious injury or death 10 A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system This system consists of a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter and a Wireless Ignition Node WIN with integral ignition switch You can insert the Key Fob into the ignition switch with either side up Keyless Go Feature This vehicle may be equipped with the Keyless Go feature fo
105. NICAN REPUBLIC Reid y Compa ia John F Kennedy Casi Esq Lope de Vega Santo Domingo Dominican Republic Tel 809 562 7211 Fax 809 565 8774 281 ECUADOR Chrysler Jeep Automotriz del Ecuador Av Juan Tanca Marengo km 4 5 Guayaquil Ecuador Tel 593 4 225 7935 Fax 593 4 224 7787 EL SALVADOR Grupo Q del Salvador Blvd Los Pr ceres y Avenida No 1 Lomas de San Francisco San Salvador El Salvador Tel 503 22730988 Fax 503 278 5731 ESTONIA Silberauto AS J rvevana tee 11 11314 Tallinn Tel 06 266 098 Tel 06 266 050 Fax 06 266 066 282 FINLAND Chrysler FinlandOy Ristipellontie 5 00390 HELSINKI Tel 020 54771 Fax 020 5477 485 FRANCE Chrysler France Parc de Rocquencourt BP100 F 78153 Le Chesnay Cedex Tel 33 1 39 23 56 00 Fax 33 1 39 23 57 92 GERMANY Chrysler Deutschland GmbH Englische StraBe 30 D 10587 Berlin Telefon 49 0 30 2690 0 Telefax 49 0 30 2690 3999 GRAND DUCHY OF LUXEMBOURG NT MAILFAS C O Chrysler Belgium Luxembourg BRU BRU 37850 Antwoord Nummer 193032 1930 Zaventem Belgium Tel 0800 6661 Fax 32 02 717 33 GREECE Chrysler Jeep Dodge Hellas 240 242 Kifisias Avenue 15231 Halandri Athens Greece Tel 30 210 6700800 Fax 30 210 6700820 GUATEMALA Grupo Q del Guatemala Edificio Grupo Q calle Mariscal Cruz 9 04 Zona 4 Ciudad de Guatemala Guatemala Tel 502 6685 9500 HONDURAS Grupo Q de Honduras Blvd Centro
106. Recommended Fuel Selection 3 0L Diesel Engine Use good quality diesel fuel from a reputable supplier in your vehicle The manufacturer requires that you must fuel this vehicle with Ultra Low Sulfur Highway Diesel fuel 15 ppm Sulfur maximum and prohibits the use of Low Sulfur Highway Diesel fuel 500 ppm Sulfur maximum to avoid dam age to the emissions control system For most year round service No 2 diesel fuel meeting ASTM specification D 975 Grade S15 will provide good performance If the vehicle is exposed to extreme cold below 20F or 7C or is required to operate at colder than normal conditions for prolonged periods use climatized No 2 diesel fuel or dilute the No 2 diesel fuel with 5096 No 1 diesel fuel This will provide better protection from fuel gelling or wax plugging of the fuel filters This vehicle is fully compatible with biodiesel blends up to 5 6 biodiesel meeting ASTM specification D 975 251 Chassis Component Automatic Transmission Brake Master Cylinder Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed ATF 4 product MOPAR DOT 3 and SAE J1703 should be used or equivalent If DOT 3 brake fluid is not avail able then DOT 4 is acceptable Use only recommended brake fluids MOPAR Power Steering Fluid 4 MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed ATF 4 product API GL 5 SAE 75W140 Synthetic Gear Lubrica
107. STUCK VEHICLE f your vehicle becomes stuck in mud sand or snow it can often be moved by a rocking motion Turn your steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the front wheels Then shift back and forth between REVERSE and DRIVE Using minimal accelerator pedal pres sure to maintain the rocking motion without spinning the wheels is most effective NOTE Turn off the Electronic Stability Program ESP before rocking the vehicle Refer to Electronic Stability Program in Section 5 CAUTION e When rocking a stuck vehicle by moving between 1st and REVERSE do not spin the wheels faster than 15 mph 24 km h or drivetrain damage may result e Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast may lead to transmission overheat ing and failure It can also damage the tires Do not spin the wheels above 30 mph 48 km h WARNING Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage or even failure of the axle and tires A tire could explode and injure someone Do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h or for longer than 30 sec onds continuously without stopping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the speed TOW EYES Your vehicle is equipped with tow eyes which are mounted in the front and the rear CAUTION Tow eyes are for emergency use only to rescue a vehicl
108. Sense can be active only when the shift lever is in REVERSE If Rear ParkSense is enabled at this shift lever position the system will be active until the vehicle speed is in creased to approximately 11 mph 18 km h or above The Rear ParkSense system will be active again if the vehicle speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately 10 mph 16 km h 108 Rear ParkSense Sensors The four Rear ParkSense sensors located in the rear fascia bumper monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within the sensors field of view The sensors can detect obstacles from ap proximately 12 in 30 cm up to 59 in 150 cm from the rear fascia oumper in the horizontal direction depending on the location type and orientation of the obstacle Rear ParkSense Warning Display The Rear ParkSense warning display located in the headliner near the liftgate provides both audio and visual warnings to indicate the dis tance between the rear fascia bumper and the detected obstacle 032305242 Rear ParkSense LED Display When the ignition is changed to the RUN ON position the warning display will turn ON all of its LEDs for approximately one second Each side of the warning display has six yellow and two red LEDs The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the red LED is ON The Rear ParkSense system illuminates the two inner most yellow LEDs when it is ON and detecting no obstacles The following chart shows the Warnin
109. The manufacturer requires that you must fuel this vehicle with Ultra Low Sulfur Highway Diesel fuel 15 ppm Sulfur maximum and prohibits the use of Low Sulfur Highway Die sel fuel 500 ppm Sulfur maximum to avoid damage to the emissions control system ADDING FUEL Locking Fuel Filler Cap Gas Cap The locking gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door on the left side of the vehicle Push in on the left side near the edge of the fuel filler door to access the fuel filler cap If the gas cap is lost or damaged be sure the replacement cap is for use with this vehicle WARNING Do not use alcohol or gasoline as a fuel blending agent They can be unstable under certain conditions and hazardous or explosive when mixed with diesel fuel Diesel fuel is seldom completely free of water To prevent fuel system trouble drain the accu mulated water from the fuel water separator using the fuel water separator drain provided If you buy good quality fuel and follow the cold weather advice above fuel conditioners should not be required in your vehicle If available in your area a high cetane premium diesel fuel may offer improved cold starting and warm up performance 194 81368080 Fuel Filler Door 1 Turn off engine 2 Insert the valet key stored behind the key fob into the fuel cap and turn the key one quarter turn to the right then rotate the fuel cap to the left to remove 3 After remov
110. This especially applies to children 38 Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain SABIC Inflator Units If Equipped During collisions where the impact is confined to a particular area of the side of the vehicle the ORC may deploy the SABIC airbags de pending on severity and type of collision In these events the ORC will deploy the SABIC only on the impact side of the vehicle A quantity of non toxic gas is generated to inflate the side curtain airbag The inflating side curtain airbag pushes the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and covers the win dow The airbag inflates in about 30 ms about one quarter of the time that it takes to blink your eyes with enough force to injure you if you are not belted and seated properly or if items are positioned in the area where the side curtain airbag inflates This especially applies to chil dren The side curtain airbag is only about 3 1 2 in 9 cm thick when it is inflated Because airbag sensors estimate deceleration over time vehicle speed and damage are not good indicators of whether or not an airbag should have deployed Front and Side Impact Sensors In front and side impacts impact sensors aid the ORC in determining appropriate response to impact events Additional sensors in the ORC determine the level of airbag deployment and provide verification Enhanced Accident Response System In the event of an impact causing airbag de ployment
111. To provide a safer environment for small chil dren riding in the rear seats the rear doors are equipped with a Child Protection Door Lock system To Engage the Child Protection Door Lock System 1 Open the rear door 2 Insert the tip of the emergency key or similar object into the child lock control and pull it upward 23 NOTE For emergency key information refer to A Word About Your Keys in this section Child Lock Control 3 Repeat Steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door NOTE When the Child Protection Door Lock sys tem is engaged the door can be opened only by using the outside door handle even though the inside door lock is in the un locked position 24 WARNING Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a colli sion Remember that the rear doors can only be opened from the outside when the child protection locks are engaged Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death NOTE e After engaging the Child Protection Door Lock system always test the door from the inside to make certain it is in the desired position e For emergency exit with the system en gaged move the door lock plunger to the UNLOCK position roll down the window and open the door with the outside door handle To Disengage the Child Protection Door Lock System 1 Open the rear door 2 Insert the tip of the emergency key or similar object into the child lock control and pull
112. WARNING If a warning light remains on the system may not be working and you will not have the benefit of ESP or BAS Under certain driving conditions where ESP or BAS would be ben eficial you if you have not adjusted your driving speeds and stopping in or to account for the lack of the feature may be in accident 14 Airbag Warning Light This light will turn on for six to eight o seconds as a bulb check when the ry ignition switch is first turned ON If the light is either not on during starting or stays on or turns on while driving then have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible Refer to Occupant Restraints in Section 2 for more information 15 Brake Warning Light This light monitors various brake functions including brake fluid O level and parking brake applica tion If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied that the brake fluid level is low or that there is a problem with the anti lock brake system reservoir If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged and the fluid level is at the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system malfunction In this case the light will remain on until the condition has been corrected The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic system A leak in either half of the dua
113. a set of desired radio station presets Your Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter can also be pro grammed to recall the same positions when the UNLOCK button is pressed 84 NOTE e Only one RKE transmitter can be linked to each of the memory positions e Passive Entry door handles cannot be linked to the memory function Use either the memory recall switch or the RKE transmitter if linked to the memory fea ture to recall memory positions 1 or 2 The memory switch is located on the driver s door trim panel The switch contains an S button to activate the memory save function It also contains a rocker switch labeled with the number 1 and the number 2 The rocker switch allows the driver to recall either of two pre programmed memory profiles by pressing the appropriate side of the switch p _ Memory Switch Programming The Memory Feature NOTE Saving a new memory profile will erase an existing profile from memory To create a new memory profile perform the following 1 Place the ignition into the RUN position 2 Adjust all memory profile settings to desired preferences i e seat side mirror adjustable pedals if equipped power tilt and telescopic steering column if equipped and radio sta tion presets 3 Press and release the SET S button on the memory switch 4 Within five seconds press and release the MEMORY button 1 or 2 The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC if
114. ades varies de pending on geographical area and fre quency of use Poor performance of blades may be present with chattering marks wa ter lines or wet spots If any condition is present please proceed to clean wiper blades with humid cloth removing any de bris that may be affecting its function Adding Washer Fluid The windshield washer and the headlight washer if equipped share the same fluid res ervoir The fluid reservoir is located in the front of the engine compartment Be sure to check the fluid level in the reservoir at regular inter vals Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent not radiator antifreeze and operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the residual water When refilling the washer fluid reservoir apply some washer fluid to a cloth or towel and wipe the wiper blades clean This will help blade performance To prevent freeze up of your windshield washer system in cold weather select a solution or mixture that meets or exceeds the temperature range of your climate This rating information can be found on most washer fluid containers The fluid reservoir will hold nearly 1 gal 4 L of washer fluid when the message Low Washer Fluid appears in the Electronic Vehicle Infor mation Center EVIC if equipped 231 WARNING Commercially available windshield washer solvents are flammable They could ignite and burn you Care must be exercised when filling or working around th
115. ags If the vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Seat Airbags they are marked with an airbag label sewn into the outboard side of the seat NOTE Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim but they will open during airbag deployment Airbag System Components The airbag system consists of the following Occupant Restraint Controller ORC e Airbag Warning Light e Driver Front Airbag e Front Passenger Airbag e Front and Side Impact Sensors e Steering Wheel and Column e Instrument Panel 33 e Knee Impact Bolster e Front Seat Belt Pretensioners if equipped e Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Cur tains SABIC if equipped e Supplemental Side Seat Airbags if equipped Advanced Front Airbag Features The Advanced Front Airbag system has multi stage driver and front passenger airbags This system provides output appropriate to the se verity and type of collision as determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC which may receive information from the impact sen sors at the front of the car The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an impact that requires airbag deploy ment The timing of the second stage deter mines whether the output force is low medium or high If a low output is sufficient to meet the need the remaining gas in the inflator is ex pended 34 WARNING Do not put anything on or around the airbag covers or attempt to open them manu
116. ain as possible by blotting with a clean dry towel e Blot any remaining stain with a clean damp towel 239 For tough stains apply MOPAR Total Clean or a mild soap solution to a clean damp cloth and remove the stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue e For grease stains apply MOPAR Multi Purpose Cleaner or equivalent to a clean damp cloth and remove the stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue e Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of protectants on Stain Repel products Interior Care Use MOPAR Fabric Cleaner or equivalent to clean fabric upholstery and MOPAR Carpet Cleaner or equivalent for carpeting Interior Trim should be cleaned starting with a damp cloth or MOPAR Satin Select or equiva lent Do not use harsh cleaners or Armor All Use MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent to clean vinyl upholstery MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent is specifi cally recommended for leather upholstery Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive 240 and damage the leather upholstery and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth Stub born soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and appropriate products such as MO PAR Total Clean or equivalent Care should be taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid Please do not use polishes oils cleaning fluids
117. ain on solid In addition the EVIC will dis play a CHECK TPM SYSTEM message for three seconds and then display dashes in place of the pressure value 4 For each subsequent ignition switch cycle a chime will sound the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid and the EVIC will display a CHECK TPM SYSTEM message for three seconds and then display dashes in place of the pres sure value 5 Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare the TPMS will update automati cally In addition the TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF and the graphic in the EVIC will display a new pressure value instead of dashes as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information TPMS Deactivation amp Reactivation The TPMS can be deactivated if replacing all four wheel and tire assemblies road tires with wheel and tire assemblies that do not have TPMS Sensors such as when installing winter wheel and tire assemblies on your vehicle To deactivate the TPMS first replace all four wheel and tire assemblies road tires with those not equipped with TPM sensors Then drive the vehicle for 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h The TPMS will chi
118. al Starting procedure Clearing A Flooded Engine Using Fob With Integrated Key If the engine fails to start after you have fol lowed the Normal Starting or Extreme Cold Weather procedures it may be flooded To clear any excess fuel push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it Then turn the ignition switch to the START position and release it as soon as the starter engages The starter motor will disengage automatically in 10 seconds Once this occurs release the accelerator pedal turn the ignition switch to the 161 LOCK position wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the Normal Starting procedure CAUTION To prevent damage to the starter wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again After Starting The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will decrease as the engine warms up Normal Starting Diesel Engines Observe the following when the engine is op erating e All message center lights are off e Malfunction Indicator Light MIL is off e Low Oil Pressure Light is off Cold Weather Precautions Operation in ambient temperature below 32 F 0 C may require special considerations The following chart suggests these options 162 No 2 Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel Fuel 7 C aor ar Diese wc OF wo 2 Ultra Low Sulfur 23 C ao Climatized Diesel Fuel __ No 1 Ultra Low 29 C E ee E Sulfur Diesel Fuel 81949058
119. al malfunctions examined by an authorized dealership or qualified repair center e Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids that protect the performance and durability of your vehicle and also allow extended maintenance intervals Do not use chemical flushes in these components as the chemicals can damage your engine transmission power steering or air condi tioning Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty If a flush is needed because of component malfunc tion use only the specified fluid for the flushing procedure 226 Engine Oil Checking Oil Level 2 7L and 3 5L Engines To assure proper engine lubrication the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level Check the oil level at regular intervals such as every fuel stop The best time to check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings Maintain the oil level between the IN and MAX markings on the dipstick Adding 1 0 at 1 0 1 of oil when the reading is at the IN mark will result in a MAX reading on these engines CAUTION Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aera tion or loss of oil pressure This could damage your engine Checking Oil Level 5 7L Engine and 3 0L Diesel To assure proper engine lubrication the engine oil must be maintained at the cor
120. al road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare the TPMS will update automati cally and the TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information TPMS Deactivation amp Reactivation The TPMS can be deactivated if replacing all four wheel and tire assemblies road tires with wheel and tire assemblies that do not have TPMS Sensors such as when installing winter wheel and tire assemblies on your vehicle To deactivate the TPMS first replace all four wheel and tire assemblies road tires with those not equipped with TPM Sensors Then drive the vehicle for 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h The TPMS will chime and the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid Upon the next ignition switch cycle the TPMS will no longer chime or turn on the TPM Telltale Light To reactivate the TPMS first replace all four wheel and tire assemblies road tires with those equipped with TPM Sensors Then drive the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h The TPMS will chime and the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds Premium System If Equipped The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mo
121. aler Refer to Adaptive Cruise Control ACC in Section 3 if equipped Adjustable Pedals Disabled Cruise En gaged with a single chime only available on vehicles equipped with memory seats Adjustable Pedals Disabled Vehicle In RE VERSE with a single chime only avail able on vehicles equipped with memory seats Left Front Low Pressure with a single chime Refer to information on Tire Pres sure and Tire Pressure Monitor under Starting And Operating Left Rear Low Pressure with a single chime Refer to information on Tire Pressure and Tire Pressure Monitor under Starting And Operating Right Front Low Pressure with a single chime Refer to information on Tire Pres sure and Tire Pressure Monitor under Starting And Operating Right Rear Low Pressure with a single chime Refer to information on Tire Pres 133 sure and Tire Pressure Monitor under Starting And Operating Check TPM System with a single chime Refer to information on Tire Pressure Moni tor under Starting And Operating e Check Gascap refer to Adding Fuel in Section 5 Service Park Assist System with a single chime if equipped e Key Fob Battery Low e Service Keyless System e Wrong Key Engine Oil Change Indicator System Oil Change Required Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system The Oil Change Re quired m
122. all the replacement bulb 818db273 1 License Lamp Bulb 2 Socket 4 Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly 5 Reattach the lamp to the rear fascia and then install the screws FLUID CAPACITIES U S Metric Fuel Approximate 2 7L and 3 5L Engines 18 Gallons 68 Liters 5 7L Engine 19 Gallons 72 Liters 3 0L Diesel Engine 19 Gallons 72 Liters Engine Oil with Filter 2 7L and 3 5L Engines 6 Quarts 5 7 Liters 5 7L Engine 7 Quarts 6 6 Liters 3 0L Diesel Engine 10 Quarts 9 5 Liters Cooling System 2 7L Engine 10 4 Quarts 9 8 Liters 3 5L Engine 11 4 Quarts 10 8 Liters 5 7L Engine 15 1 Quarts 14 3 Liters 3 0L Diesel Engine 13 2 Quarts 12 5 Liters Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level 249 FLUIDS LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS Engine Component Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Engine Coolant MOPARe Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula HOAT Hybrid Organic Additive Technol ogy or equivalent Engine Oil 2 7L amp 5 7L Engines Non ACEA Use API Certified SAE 5W 20 engine oil meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard Categories MS 6395 Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade SAE 5W 30 engine oil ap proved to MB 229 31 or MB 229 51 may be used when SAE 5W 20 engine oil is not available Engine Oil 2 7L amp 5 7L Engines ACEA For countries that use th
123. ally You may damage the airbags and you could be injured because the airbags may no longer be functional The protective cov ers for the airbag cushions are designed to open only when the airbags are inflating e Do not drill cut or tamper with the knee bolster in any way Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster such as alarm lights stereos citi zen band radios etc Supplemental Side Seat Airbags If Equipped Supplemental side seat airbags provide en hanced protection and work together with Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains SABIC to help protect an occupant during a side impact 022607296 Supplemental Side Seat Airbag Label When the bag deploys it opens the seam between the front and side of the seat s trim cover Each bag deploys independently that is a left side impact deploys the left bag only and a right side impact deploys only the right bag Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain SABIC If Equipped SABIC airbags offer side impact protection to front and rear seat outboard occupants in ad dition to that provided by the body structure Each airbag features inflated chambers placed adjacent to the head of each outboard occu pant that reduce the potential for side impact head injuries The curtains deploy downward covering both windows on the impact side Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains SABIC NOTE Airbag covers may not be obvious i
124. and release the FUNCTION SE LECT button until ON or OFF appears When OFF is selected the system reverts to the standard intermittent wiper operation Automatically Move Seat Back on Exit If Equipped This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until ON or OFF appears NOTE The seat will return to the memorized seat location if Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock is set to ON when the RKE transmit ter is used to unlock the door Refer to Easy Entry Exit Seat under Driver Memory Seat in Section 3 Flash Lights with Remote Key Lock When ON is selected the front and rear turn signals will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmitter To make your selection press and release the FUNC TION SELECT button until ON or OFF ap pears Headlights On with Wipers Available with Auto Headlights Only When ON is selected and the headlight switch is in the Auto position the headlights will turn 141 on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature To make your selec tion press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until ON or OFF appears NOTE Turning the hea
125. ano 5G iPod and iPhone devices Some iPod software versions may not fully support the UCI features Please visit Apple s website for software up dates NOTE e If the radio has a USB port connecting an iPod to this port does not play the media For playing an iPod use the separate 16 pin connector port in the glove com partment on some vehicles Connecting an iPod to the AUX port located in the radio faceplate plays me dia but does not use the UCI feature to control the connected device Connecting The iPod Use the provided connection cable to connect an iPod to the vehicle s 16 pin connector port which is located in the glove compartment on 143 some vehicles Once the iPod is connected and synchronized to the vehicle s UCI system iPod may take a few seconds to connect the iPod starts charging and is ready for use by pressing radio switches as described below NOTE e You may have to remove the connector pin protection cap from the 16 pin con nector port prior to connecting the cable e If the iPod battery is completely dis charged it may not communicate with the UCI system until a minimum charge is attained Leaving the iPod connected to the UCI system may charge it to the re quired level Using This Feature By using the provided connection cable to connect an iPod to the vehicle s UCI 16 pin connector port e The iPod audio can be played on the vehi cle s so
126. ant You may want to call a service center if your vehicle overheats If you decide to look under the hood yourself refer to Section 7 and follow the warnings under the Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph 18 Trip Odometer Button Trip Odometer Button Press this button to change the display from odometer to either of two trio odometer set tings The letter A or B will appear when in the trip odometer mode Push in and hold the button for two seconds to reset the trip odom eter to O miles km The odometer must be in TRIP mode to reset it 19 High Beam Light This light will turn on when the high beam headlights are ON Push the multifunction lever away from the steer ing wheel to switch the headlights to high beam Refer to Multifunction Lever under Lights in Section 3 for more information 20 Shift Lever Indicator The Shift Lever Indicator is self contained within the instrument cluster It displays the gear position of the automatic transmission 21 Seat Belt Reminder Light This light will turn on for five to eight A seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON A chime will sound if the driver s seat belt is unbuckled during the bulb check The seat belt reminder light will flash or remain on con tinuously if the drivers seat belt remains un buckled after the bulb check or when driving Refer to Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System BeltAlert
127. ants and Genuine Parts in this section for the correct fluid type Using the wrong type of brake fluid can severely damage your brake system and or impair its perfor mance The proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is also labeled on the original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder reservoir Continued WARNING Continued e To avoid contamination from foreign matter or moisture use only new brake fluid or fluid that has been in a tightly closed con tainer Keep the master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times Brake fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the air resulting in a lower boiling point This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged braking resulting in sud den brake failure This could result in a accident Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts causing the brake fluid to catch fire Brake fluid can also damage painted and vinyl surfaces care should be taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces e Do not allow petroleum based fluid to con taminate the brake fluid Brake seal com ponents could be damaged causing partial or complete brake failure This could result in an accident Automatic Transmission Fluid Level Check Regular automatic transmission fluid level checks are not required For this reason the dipstick is omitted f you notice fluid loss or transmission malfunc t
128. applied It does not show the degree of brake application When parking on a hill it is important to turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade Apply the parking brake before placing the shift lever in PARK otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK The parking brake should always be applied whenever the driver is not in the vehicle 176 WARNING e Never use the PARK position as a substi tute for the parking brake Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally in jured Do not leave the key fob in the ignition switch A child could operate power win dows other controls or move the vehicle Be sure the parking brake is fully disen gaged before driving failure to do so can lead to brake failure and an accident Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving your vehicle or it may roll and cause damage or injury Also be certain to leave the transmission in PARK Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury CAUTION If the Brake Warning Light remains on with the parking brake released a brake system malfunction
129. aries considerably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service MOPAR engine air cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recommended Maintenance Free Battery The top of the maintenance free battery is permanently sealed You will never have to add water nor is periodic maintenance required NOTE The battery is stored under an access cover in the trunk Remote battery terminals are located in the engine compartment for jump starting 8134298a Battery Location WARNING e Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can burn or even blind you Do not allow battery fluid to contact your eyes skin or clothing Do not lean over a battery when attaching clamps If acid splashes in eyes or on skin flush the area immediately with large amounts of water Continued WARNING Continued e Battery gas is flammable and explosive Keep flame or sparks away from the bat tery Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output greater than 12 Volts Do not allow cable clamps to touch each other e Battery posts terminals and related acces sories contain lead and lead compounds Wash hands after handling e The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that should not be disconnected and should only be replaced with a battery of the same type vented 229 CAUTION e It is essential when replacing the cables on the battery tha
130. arking on a flat surface place the shift lever in the PARK position first and then apply the parking brake When parking on a hill it is important to set the parking brake before placing the shift lever in PARK otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of park As an added precaution turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade WARNING Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the parking brake Always apply the park ing brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or dam age The following indicators should be used to ensure that you have engaged the shift lever in the PARK position e When shifting into PARK move the shift lever all the way forward and left until it stops and is fully seated e Look at the shift indicator display on the instrument panel to ensure it is in the PARK position CAUTION Damage to the shifter could result if the shift lever is moved out of PARK before the ignition switch is turned from the LOCK OFF position with Keyless Go to ON position RUN position with Keyless Go REVERSE This range is used for moving the vehicle rearward Always stop before moving the shift ever to REVERSE NEUTRAL This range is used when the vehicle is standing for prolonged periods with the engine running The engine may be st
131. arm itself in about 16 seconds During that time the Vehicle Security Light will flash If it does not illuminate the Vehicle Secu rity Alarm is not arming In addition if you open a door during the arming period the Vehicle Security Alarm will cancel the arming process If you wish to rearm the Vehicle Security Alarm after closing the door you must repeat one of the previously described arming sequences Vehicles Equipped with Keyless Go Press the Keyless Go Start Stop button until the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC indicates that the vehicle ignition is OFF refer to Keyless Go in Section 5 for more informa tion Then either press the power door LOCK switch while the driver or passenger door is open press the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter LOCK button or press the Passive Entry Door Handle LOCK button refer to Pas sive Entry under Door Locks in this Section for more information 15 To Disarm the System Vehicles Not Equipped with Keyless Go Either press the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter or insert a valid ignition key into the ignition switch and turn the key to the ON position NOTE e The driver s door key cylinder and the trunk button on the RKE transmitter can not arm or disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm e The Vehicle Security Alarm remains armed during trunk entry Pressing the TRUNK button will not disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm If someone enters the ve
132. arted in this range Set the parking brake if you must leave the vehicle CAUTION Coasting the vehicle or driving for any other reason with shift lever in NEUTRAL can result in transmission damage 167 WARNING Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the ignition to coast down a hill These are unsafe practices that limit your response to changing traffic or road conditions You might lose control of the vehicle and have an acci dent D Overdrive This range is used for most city and highway driving It provides the smoothest up shifts and down shifts and the best fuel economy Select the 3 range when frequent transmission shift ing occurs when using the Overdrive range such as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions in hilly terrain trav eling into strong head winds or while towing heavy trailers NOTE e If the vehicle is started in cold tempera tures shifts into Overdrive may be de layed Normal Overdrive and shifting op eration will resume when the temperature of the transmission reaches the appropri 168 ate temperature Refer to the Note un der Torque Converter Clutch later in this section e If the transmission temperature gets too hot the transmission may downshift out of Overdrive or engage Overdrive at higher vehicle speeds until the transmis sion cools down After cooldown Over drive will resume normal operation
133. articles The particles are a nor mal by product of the process that gener ates the non toxic gas used for airbag infla tion These airborne particles may irritate the skin eyes nose or throat If you have skin or eye irritation rinse the area with cool water For nose or throat irritation move to fresh air If the irritation continues see your doctor If these particles settle on your clothing follow the garment manufacturer s instructions for cleaning Do not drive your vehicle after the airbags have deployed If you are involved in another colli Sion the airbags will not be in place to protect you WARNING Deployed airbags and seat belt pretensioners cannot protect you in another collision Have the airbags seat belt pretensioners and the front passenger seat belt retractor assembly replaced by an authorized dealer as soon as possible Also have the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC system serviced as well Maintaining Your Airbag System WARNING e Modifications to any part of the airbag System could cause it to fail when you need it You could be injured if the airbag system is not there to protect you Do not modify the components or wiring including adding any kind of badges or stickers to the steer ing wheel hub trim cover or the upper right side of the instrument panel Do not modify the front bumper vehicle body structure or add aftermarket side steps or running boards e It is dang
134. at include Anti Lock Brake System ABS Traction Control Sys tem TCS Brake Assist System BAS and the Electronic Stability Program ESP All four of these systems work together to enhance vehicle stability and control in various driving conditions 177 Anti Lock Brake System ABS This system aids the driver in maintaining ve hicle control under adverse braking conditions by controlling hydraulic brake pressure This prevents wheel lock up to help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking Refer to Anti Lock Brake System in Section 5 of this manual WARNING The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions The ABS cannot prevent ac cidents including those resulting from exces sive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydroplaning Only a safe atten tive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner that could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others 178 Traction Control System TCS This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each driven wheel If wheel spin is detected brake pressure is applied to the slipping wheel s and engine power is reduced to pro vide enhanced acceleration and stability Brake Assist System BAS This system complements th
135. aust system Perform the first inspection at 12 500 miles 20 000 km or 12 months Inspect the CV joints Perform the first inspection at 12 500 miles 20 000 km or 12 months Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 18 750 Miles 30 000 km or 18 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 1 Rotate tires Inspect the rear axle fluid Change if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 267 25 000 Miles 40 000 km or 24 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires Replace the engine air cleaner filter Replace the fuel filter water separator unit Inspect the brake linings and replace if necessary Replace the air conditioning filter if equipped Inspect the exhaust system Inspect the CV joints Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals and replace if necessary Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes C Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 31 250 Miles 50 000 km or 30 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Rotate tires Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code S
136. ay of LOW FUEL This display will continue until the ve hicle runs out of fuel Adding a significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the LOW FUEL text and a new DTE value will isplay e Trip A Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the last reset Trip B Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last reset o e Elapsed Time Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset when the ignition switch is in the ACC position Elapsed time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON or START position e Display Units of Measure in To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until US or MET RIC appears 135 To Reset The Display Reset will only occur while a resettable function is being displayed Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button once to clear the resettable function being displayed To reset all resettable functions press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button a second time within three seconds of resetting the currently displayed function Reset ALL will display dur ing this three second window Automatic All Wheel Drive AWD Displays If Equipped Automatic AWD operation could be activated by outside temperature wheel slip or other predetermined conditions when the vehicle automatically transitions from RWD to AWD the EVIC will display the following message for five seconds 136 0410059
137. be locked in the vehicle To Enter the Trunk With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 3 ft 1 0 m of the deck lid press the button on the left side of CHMSL Center High Mounted Stop Light which is located on the deck lid NOTE If you inadvertently leave your vehicle s Passive Entry RKE transmitter in the trunk and try to close the deck lid the deck lid will automatically unlatch unless another one of the vehicle s Passive Entry RKE transmit ters is outside the vehicle and within 3 ft 1 0 m of the deck lid To Lock the Vehicle s Doors The front door handles have LOCK buttons located on the outside of the handle with one of the vehicle s Passive Entry RKE transmitters within 5 ft 1 5 m of the driver s side press the driver s door handle LOCK button to lock all four doors With one of the vehicles Passive Entry RKE transmitters within 5 ft 1 5 m of the passenger side press the passenger s door handle LOCK button to lock all four doors NOTE e After an outside handle lock cycle the system will not allow a passive entry to unlock the same door for two seconds However the RKE unlock function will work during this time period e The passive entry system will not operate if the RKE transmitter battery is dead The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the RKE transmitter lock button or the lock button located on the vehicle s interior door panel Child Protection Door Lock
138. be used 227 Lubricants that have both an SAE grade num ber and the API Certification Symbol or ACEA category and that are approved to MB 229 31 or MB 229 51 shown on the container should be used Engine Oil Viscosity 3 0L Diesel Engine CAUTION Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced technology Diesel Engine and an emission device designed to limit Diesel Particulate Emissions from being released into the atmo sphere The durability of your engine and life expectancy of this diesel particulate filter emission device is highly dependent on the use of the correct engine oil SAE 5W 30 Synthetic Low Ash engine oil is recommended for all operating temperatures This engine oil improves low temperature start ing and vehicle fuel economy The engine oil filler cap also shows the recom mended engine oil viscosity for your engine For information on engine oil filler cap location refer to Engine Compartment in this section 228 Synthetic Engine Oils You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recommended oil quality requirements are met and the recommended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are followed Materials Added to Engine Oil Do not add any supplemental materials other than leak detection dyes to your engine oil Engine oil is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemen tal additives Disposing of Used Engine Oil and Oil Filters Care sh
139. ble the RKE transmitter case snap the two halves together General Information Transmitter and receivers operate on a carrier frequency of 433 92 MHz as required by EEC regulations These devices must be certified to conform to specific regulations in each indi vidual country Two sets of regulations are involved ETS European Telecommunication Standard 300 220 which most countries use and German BZT federal regulation 2252125 which is based on ETC 300 220 but has addi tional unique requirements Other defined re quirements are noted in ANNEX VI of COMMIS SION DIRECTIVE 95 56 EC Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interfer ence e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal distance check for these two condi tions 1 A weak battery in the RKE transmitter The expected life of the battery is a minimum of three years 2 Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station tower airport transmitter and some mobile or CB radios 19 DOOR LOCKS Manual Door Locks To lock each door push the door lock plunger on each door trim panel downward To unlock each door pull the door lock plunger on each door trim panel upward Door Lock Plunger If the door lock plunger is down when you shut the door the door will lock Make
140. brake firmly and set an automatic transmission in PARK a manual transmission in REVERSE e Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a jack Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a jack e Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for lifting this vehicle during a tire change e If working on or near a roadway be ex tremely careful of motor traffic e To assure that spare tires flat or inflated are securely stowed spares must be stowed with the valve stem facing the ground e Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher Continued Jack Warning Label 1 Block the wheel diagonally opposite the flat tire Passengers should not remain in the ve hicle when the vehicle is being jacked 2 Remove the spare tire jack and lug wrench 3 If equipped with steel wheels do not remove the wheel cover at this time If equipped with aluminum wheels where the center cap covers the lug nuts use the lug wrench to pry the center cap off carefully before raising the ve hicle 8133d194 Center Cap Removal i 060503826 Lug Nut Removal Installation 1 Tighten WARNING To avoid possible personal injury handle the wheel covers with care to avoid contact with the metal edges and retention teeth 4 Before raising the vehicle use the lug wrench to loosen but not remove the lug nuts on the wheel with th
141. c Speed Control lever inward toward the steering column and release The indicator in the instrument cluster on some models will illuminate to show that the Electronic Speed Control sys tem is on To turn the system off push the lever inward toward the steering column again and release At this time the system and the indi cator light will turn off WARNING Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on when not in use is dangerous You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want You could lose control and have an accident Always leave the sys tem off when you are not using it To Set At A Desired Speed When the vehicle reaches the speed desired push the lever downward to SET DECEL and release Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal and the vehicle will operate at the se lected speed NOTE e Electronic Speed Control will only func tion in 3rd 4th or 5th gear when in the Autostick mode e The Electronic Speed Control may not engage if a different size tire is installed on one wheel such as the compact spare tire To Deactivate The system will disable Electronic Speed Con trol without erasing the memory if you e Softly tap the brake pedal e Press the brake pedal e Push the speed control lever away from you CANCEL Pushing the lever to ON OFF and releasing or turning the ignition OFF erases the set speed from memory To Resume Speed
142. call e For example you can say 151 1234 5555 e The uconnect phone will confirm the phone number and then dial The number will appear in the display of certain radios Call by Saying a Name e Press the button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Call e The system will prompt you to say the name of the person you want to call e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say the name of the person you want to call For example you can say John Doe where John Doe is a previously stored name entry in the uconnect phonebook or down loaded phonebook To learn how to store a name in the phonebook refer to Add Names to Your uconnect Phonebook e The uconnect phone will confirm the name and then dial the corresponding phone num ber which may appear in the display of certain radios Add Names to Your uconnect Phonebook NOTE Adding names to the uconnect phone book is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion Press the button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook New Entry e When prompted say the name of the new entry Use of long names helps the voice recognition and it is recommended For ex ample say Robert Smith or Robert in stead of Bob e When prompted enter the number designa tion e g Home Work Cellular or Pager This will allow you to store mu
143. can be turned on or off To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT but ton until ON or OFF appears Turn by Turn Navigation If Equipped When ON is selected the turn by turn direc tions will appear in the display as the vehicle approaches a designated turn within a pro grammed route To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until ON or OFF appears Display Units of Measure in The EVIC odometer and uconnect gps if equipped can be changed between English and Metric units of measure To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until ENGLISH or METRIC appears SOUND SYSTEMS Refer to your Sound Systems Booklet SETTING THE ANALOG CLOCK To set the analog clock at the top center of the instrument panel press and hold the button until the setting is correct Analog Clock UNIVERSAL CONSUMER INTERFACE UCI IF EQUIPPED NOTE This section is for sales code RES and REQ REL RET radios only with uconnect For sales code RER RBZ REN REP REW RB2 or REZ touch screen radio UCI feature refer to the separate RER REN RBZ RB2 or REZ User s Manual UCI is available only if equipped as an option with these radios This feature allows you to plug an iPod into the vehicle s sound system through a 16 pin con nector using the provided interface cable UCI supports Mini 4G Photo N
144. cessary to prevent damage to the vehicle Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle Flatbed towing is recommended Vehicles WITHOUT AWD may be towed with rear wheels on the ground with the transmis sion in NEUTRAL under the following condi tions e The distance to be traveled must not exceed 15 miles 24 km e The towing speed must not exceed 30 mph 48 km h CAUTION Exceeding these towing limits may cause severe transmission damage Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty CAUTION Do not attempt to tow this vehicle from the front with sling type towing equipment Damage to the front fascia will result Continued CAUTION Continued e If the transmission is not operative or if the vehicle is to be towed more than 15 miles 24 km or faster than 30 mph 48 km h then the only approved method of towing is with a flatbed truck Otherwise damage to the transmission may result e Do not tow the vehicle from the rear Dam age to the rear sheet metal and fascia will occur Do not push or tow this vehicle with another vehicle as damage to the bumper fascia and transmission may result If you must use the accessories wipers de frosters etc while being towed the key must be in the ON position not the ACC position Make certain the transmission remains in NEU TRAL Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle With A Tow Dolly The manufact
145. cified following distance for ACC can be set by varying the distance setting between long medium and short Using this distance setting and the vehicle speed ACC calculates and sets the distance to the vehicle ahead This distance setting displays in the EVIC LE LY DISTANCE SET 3 THe MO 1 Sensor Bars Default Distance Setting is Three Bars Long You can change the distance setting by pulling the lever toward you and release DIS TANCE Each time this is done the distance setting changes between long medium and short If there is no vehicle ahead the vehicle will maintain the set speed If a slower moving vehicle is detected in the same lane the EVIC displays the Sensed Vehicle Indicator icon and the system adjusts vehicle speed auto matically to maintain the distance setting re gardless of the set speed The vehicle will then maintain the set distance until e The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above the set speed e The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or view of the sensor e The vehicle ahead slows to a speed below 15 mph 24 km h and the system automati cally disables itself e The distance setting is changed e The system disengages Refer to the infor mation on ACC Activation The maximum braking applied by ACC is lim ited however the driver can always apply the brakes manually if necessary NOTE The brake lights will illumina
146. collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together 4 Position the lap belt across your thighs below your abdomen To remove slack in the ap belt portion pull up a bit on the shoulder belt To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight tilt the atch plate and pull on the lap belt A snug belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a collision Removing Slack From Belt WARNING e A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of internal injury in a collision The belt forces won t be at the strong hip and pelvic bones but across your abdomen Always wear the lap belt as low as possible and keep it snug e A twisted belt can t do its job as well In a collision it could even cut into you Be sure the belt is straight If you can t straighten a belt in your vehicle take it to your autho rized dealer and have it fixed 5 Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck The retractor will withdraw any slack in the belt 6 To release the belt push the red button on the buckle The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position If necessary slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow the belt to retract fully WARNING A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and leave you with no protection Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays or loos
147. column pull the lever toward you or push the lever away from you as desired NOTE For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory Seat you can use your Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter or the memory switch on the driver s door trim panel to return the tilt telescopic steering column to pre programmed positions Refer to Driver Memory Seat in this section WARNING Do not adjust the steering column while driv ing Adjusting the steering column while driv ing or driving with the steering column un locked could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle Be sure the steering column is locked before driving your vehicle Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death 93 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS IF EQUIPPED The adjustable pedals system is designed to allow a greater range of driver comfort for steering wheel tilt and seat position This fea ture allows both the brake and accelerator pedal to move toward or away from the driver to provide improved position with the steering wheel The switch is located on the front side of the driver s seat cushion side shield Adjustable Pedals Switch Press the switch forward to move the pedals forward toward the front of the vehicle 94 Press the switch rearward to move the pedals rearward toward the driver e The pedals can be adjusted with the ignition OFF e The pedals can be adjusted while driving e The pedals cannot
148. ct voice For best re sults the Voice Training session should be completed when the vehicle is parked engine running all windows closed and the blower fan switched off This procedure may be repeated with a new user The system will adapt to the ast trained voice only SEATS Seats are a primary part of the Occupant Restraint System of the vehicle They need to be used properly for safe operation of the vehicle WARNING e DO NOT allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seri ously injured or killed e Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly 79 Power Seats The power seat switch is located on the out board side of the seat near the floor Use this switch to move the driver s seat up or down forward or rearward or to recline the seat The passenger s seat will move up or down forward or rearward Power Seat Switch 80 WARNING Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is dangerous The sudden movement of the seat could cause you to lose control The seat belt might not be properly adjusted and you could be injured Adjust the seat only while the vehicle is parked CAUTION DO NOT place any article under a power seat or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to the seat controls Seat travel may become limited if
149. cting the condition of oversteer or understeer and help the vehicle maintain the desired path The ESP uses sensors in the vehicle to deter mine the path that the driver intends to steer the vehicle and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle When the actual path does not match the intended path the ESP applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the condition of oversteer or un dersteer e Oversteer when the vehicle is turning more than appropriate for the steering wheel po sition e Understeer when the vehicle is turning less than appropriate for the steering wheel po sition becomes active The ESP TCS In dicator Light also flashes when the TCS is active If the ESP TCS Indicator Light begins to flash during acceleration ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions The ESP TCS Indicator Light lo cated in the instrument cluster starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESP system WARNING The ESP cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions The ESP cannot prevent ac cidents including those resulting from exces sive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydroplaning Only a safe atten tive and skillful driver can prevent accidents
150. ctuated if equipped When the detected obstacle is about 11 8 in 30 cm from the front fascia bumper the warn ing display will actuate a continuous tone for about 10 seconds and it will turn ON either or both LEDs including both Red LEDs on the corresponding side of the display The radio will be muted while the tone is actuated if equipped The Front ParkSense system illuminates the two inner most yellow LED s when it is ON and detecting no obstacles The following chart shows the warning display operation when the System is detecting an obstacle DISPLAY LED OBSTACLE DISTANCE FROM LED COLOR AUDIBLE SIGNAL REAR CORNERS REAR CENTER Inner LED System ON Yellow None 1st LED 47 in 120 cm Yellow None 2nd LED 33 in 85 cm Yellow None 3rd LED 28 in 70 cm Yellow None 4th LED 26 in 65 cm 24 in 60 cm Yellow None 5th LED 20 in 50 cm 20 in 50 cm Yellow None 6th LED 16 in 40 cm 16 in 40 cm Red Yes Intermittent 7th LED 12 in 30 cm 12 in 30 cm Red Yes Continuous Enable Disable Front Rear abled the instrument cluster will actuate a ParkSense display will also light the red LEDs ParkSense single chime once per ignition cycle and it will indicating a problem Under this condition the The ParkSense system can be enabled and display the message ParkSense system will not operate disabled with a switch located in the switch bank of the instrument panel
151. cy key allows for entry into the vehicle should the battery in the vehicle or the RKE transmitter go dead The emergency key is also for locking the glove box You can keep the emergency key with you when valet park ing To remove the emergency key slide the me chanical latch at the top of the Key Fob side ways with your thumb and then pull the key out with your other hand 020207762 Emergency Key Removal NOTE You can insert the double sided emergency key into the lock cylinders with either side up Removing Key Fob From Ignition Place the shift lever in PARK Turn the Key Fob to the OFF position and then remove the Key Fob With the Passive Entry Keyless Go system the EVIC will display the ignition switch position OFF ACC RUN Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If Equipped in Section 4 for more information NOTE e For vehicles not equipped with the Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC the power window switches radio power sunroof if equipped and power outlets will remain active for 10 minutes after the ignition switch is placed in the OFF posi tion Opening either front door will cancel this feature e For vehicles equipped with the EVIC the power window switches radio power sun roof if equipped and power outlets will remain active for up to 60 minutes after the ignition switch is placed in the OFF posi tion Opening either front door will cance
152. d e Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left e Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure Economy mproper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire tread These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for earlier tire replacement Under inflation also increases tire rolling resistance and results in higher fuel consumption Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride Over inflation produces a jarring and un comfortable ride Tire Inflation Pressures The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver s side B Pillar Some vehicles may have Supplemental Tire Pressure Information for vehicle loads that are less than the maximum loaded vehicle condi tion These pressure conditions will be found in the Supplemental Tire Pressure Information section of this manual The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as inspecting for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least once a month Use a good quality pocket type gauge to check tire pressure Do not make a visual judgement when determining proper inflation Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they are under inflated CAUTION After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always reinstall the val
153. d being vaporized when the thermostat opens allowing hot engine coolant antifreeze to enter the radiator If an examination of your engine compartment shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks the vehicle may be safely driven The vapor will soon dissipate e Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle e Check engine coolant antifreeze freeze point in the radiator and in the coolant recov ery bottle If engine coolant antifreeze needs to be added contents of coolant recovery bottle must also be protected against freezing If frequent engine coolant antifreeze addi tions are required or if the level in the 236 coolant recovery bottle does not drop when the engine cools the cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks e Maintain engine coolant antifreeze concen tration at 50 HOAT engine coolant anti freeze minimum and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your engine which contains aluminum components e Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed e Keep the front of the radiator clean If your vehicle is equipped with air conditioning keep the front of the condenser clean e Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter operation If replacement is ever nec essary install ONLY the correct type thermo stat Other designs may result in unsatisfac tory engine coolant antifreeze performance poor gas mileage a
154. d on the sidewall of the hitch receiver With Attachment Point e For detachable tow bar pass the cable through the attachment point and clip it back onto itself 81886762 Detachable Ball Neck Loop Method e For fixed ball tow bar loop the cable around the neck of the tow ball If you fit the cable like this use a single loop only 818e675d Fixed Ball Clip Loop Method Without Attachment Points e For detachable ball tow bar you must follow the recommended manufacturer or supplier procedure 818e675b 81866760 Detachable Ball Clip Loop Method Fixed Ball Neck Loop Method 197 Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain Engine Transmission Frontal Area Max GTW Gross Trailer Wt Max Tongue Wt see note 2 7L Automatic 40 sq ft 3 72 sq m 3 307 lbs 1 500 kg 165 lbs 75 kg 3 5L and 5 7L Automatic 40 sq ft 3 72 sq m 3 803 Ibs 1 725 kg 187 Ibs 85 kg 3 0L Diesel Automatic 40 sq ft 3 72 sq m 4 400 lbs 2 000 kg 220 lbs 100 kg Maximum trailer towing speed is limited to 100 km h 62 mph unless local laws require a lower speed NOTE The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo and it should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Information placa
155. degrade battery life and or prevent the engine from starting Front Power Outlet Center Console Power Outlet e Accessories that draw higher power i e coolers vacuum cleaners lights etc will WARNING WARNING degrade the battery even more quickly Do not place ashes inside the cubby bin To avoid serious injury or death Only use these intermittently and with located on the center console on vehicle s not e Only devices designed for use in this type greater caution equipped with the ash receiver tray A fire of outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt leading to bodily injury could result outlet Continued e Do not touch with wet hands The center console outlet is powered directly e Close the lid when not in use and while rom the battery power available at all times driving the vehicle Continued 116 CAUTION Continued e After the use of high power draw accesso ries or long periods of the vehicle not being started with accessories still plugged in the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the alternator to recharge the vehicle s battery e Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only Do not hang any type of acces sory or accessory bracket from the plug Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage CUPHOLDERS Front Seat Cupholders The cupholders are located in the forward edge of the center console Front Seat Cupholder
156. dequate system lubri cation to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again Window Fogging Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly removed by turning the mode selector to Defrost The Defrost Floor mode can be used to maintain a clear windshield and provide sufficient heating If side window fogging be comes a problem increase blower speed Ve hicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild but rainy or humid weather NOTE Recirculate without A C should not be used for long periods as fogging may occur Outside Air Intake Make sure the air intake located directly in front of the windshield is free of obstructions such as leaves Leaves collected in the air intake may reduce airflow and if they enter the ple num they could plug the water drains In Winter months make sure the air intake is clear of ice slush and snow A C Air Filter If Equipped The climate control system filters outside air containing dust pollen and some odors Strong odors cannot be totally filtered out Refer to Maintenance Procedures in Section 7 for filter replacement instructions Control Setting Suggestions for Various Weather Conditions WEATHER CONTROL SETTINGS HOT WEATHER Open the windows start the vehicle set the Mode control to Panel or Bi Level AND VEHICLE INTERIOR IS 5 and tum on A C Set the Fan control to t
157. der Cover 3 Coolant Pressure Cap 4 Coolant Bottle 5 Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover 6 Power Steering Fluid JO 81d67042 7 Air Cleaner Filter 8 Engine Oil Fill 9 Engine Oil Dipstick 10 Remote Jump Start Positive Battery Post 11 Washer Fluid Bottle 224 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM OBD II Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard diagnostic system called OBD II This System monitors the performance of the emis Sions engine and automatic transmission con trol systems When these systems are operat ing properly your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel economy as well as engine emissions well within current govern ment regulations If any of these systems require service the OBD II system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL It will also store diagnos tic codes and other information to assist your service technician in making repairs Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing see your authorized dealer for Service as soon as possible CAUTION e Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause further damage to the emissions control system It could also affect fuel economy and driveability The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests can be performed e f the MIL is flashing while the engine is running severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur Immed
158. dicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale When the system detects a malfunction the telltale will flash for approxi mately one minute and then remain continu ously illuminated This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start ups as long as the malfunction exists When the malfunction indicator is illuminated the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the re placement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly 130 CAUTION The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may re sult when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor dam age Do not use aftermarket tire sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result 26 Charging System Light This light shows the status of the elec trical charging system The light should come on when th
159. dlights and park lights will flash the horn will pulse on and off and the interior lights will turn on The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless you turn it off by either pressing the PANIC button a second time or drive the ve hicle at a speed of 15 mph 24 km h or greater NOTE e The interior lights will turn off if you place the ignition switch in the ACC or RUN position while the Panic Alarm is acti vated However the exterior lights and horn will remain on e You may need to be less than 35 ft 11 m from the vehicle when using the RKE transmitter to turn off the Panic Alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted by the system Programming Additional Transmitters Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be performed at an authorized dealer Transmitter Battery Replacement The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032 battery NOTE e Perchlorate Material special handling may apply See www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate e Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back housing or the printed circuit board 1 With the RKE transmitter buttons facing down use a flat blade to pry the two halves of the RKE transmitter apart Make sure not to damage the seal during removal 2 Remove and replace the battery Avoid touching the new battery with your fingers Skin oils may cause battery deterioration If you touch a battery clean it with rubbing alcohol 3 To assem
160. dlights on during the day time causes the instrument panel lights to dim To increase the brightness refer to Lights in Section 3 Delay Turning Headlights Off When this feature is selected the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0 30 60 or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until 0 30 60 or 90 appears Tilt Mirrors Down in Reverse If Equipped When ON is selected the outside rearview mirrors will tilt downward when the ignition switch is in the ON position and the transmis sion is in the reverse position The mirrors will move back to their previous position when the 142 transmission is shifted out of reverse To make your selection press and release the FUNC TION SELECT button until ON or OFF ap pears Turn Headlights On with Remote Key Unlock When this feature is selected the headlights will activate and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until OFF 30 sec 60 sec or 90 sec ap pears Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit When this feature is selected the power win dow switches radio uconnect phone if equipped DVD video system if equipped power sunroof if equipped and power outlets w
161. ds for a self check when the ignition is first turned on After the self check the Airbag Warning Light will turn off If the ORC detects a malfunc tion in any part of the system it turns on the Airbag Warning Light either momentarily or continuously A single chime will sound if the light comes on again after initial startup O ry It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instrument cluster Airbag Warning Light if a malfunction is noted The diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction WARNING Ignoring the Airbag Warning Light in your instrument panel could mean you won t have the airbags to protect you in a collision If the light does not come on stays on after you start the vehicle or if it comes on as you drive have the airbag system checked right away Driver and Passenger Airbag Inflator Units The Driver and Passenger Airbag Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering wheel and the right side of the instrument panel When the ORC detects a collision requiring the airbags it signals the inflator units A large quantity of non toxic gas is generated to inflate the Advanced Front Airbags Different airbag inflation rates are possible based on the colli sion type and severity The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as the bags inflate to their full size The bags fully inflate in about 50
162. ds in supported languages refer to Com mand Translations Emergency Assistance If Equipped If you are in an emergency and the cellular phone is reachable e Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency number for your area If the phone is not reachable and the uconnect phone is operational you may reach the emergency number as follows e Press the to button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Emergency and the uconnect phone will instruct the paired cellular phone to call the emergency number NOTE e The default number is 112 The number dialed may not be applicable with the available cellular service and area e If supported this number may be pro grammable on some systems To do this press the 2 button say Setup followed by Emergency e The uconnect phone does slightly lower your chances of successfully mak ing a phone call as to that for the cellular phone directly WARNING Your phone must be turned on and paired to the uconnect phone to allow use of this vehicle feature in emergency situations when the cellular phone has network coverage and stays paired to the uconnect phone 67 Breakdown Service If Equipped If you need Breakdown service e Press the to button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Breakdown service NOTE The Breakdown service number has to be s
163. e se cure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle Do not leave it loose in the vehicle In a sudden stop or collision it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious personal in jury LATCH Child Seat Anchorage System Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren Your vehicle s rear seat is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH The LATCH system provides for the installation of the child restraint without using the vehicle s seat belts instead securing the child restraint using lower anchorages and upper tether straps from the child restraint to the vehicle structure LATCH compatible child restraint systems are now available However because the lower anchorages are to be introduced over a period of years child restraint systems having attach ments for those anchorages will continue to have features for installation using the vehicle s seat belts Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for connection to the top tether anchorages have been available for some time For some older child restraints many child restraint manufacturers offer add on tether strap kits or retrofit kits You are urged to take advantage of all the available attachments provided with your child restraint in any vehicle All three rear seating positions have lower an chorages that are capable of accommodating 45 LATCH compatible child seats You should NEVER install LATCH
164. e ABS by optimiz ing the vehicle braking capability during emer gency brake maneuvers This system detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake application and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes This can help reduce braking distances Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS assistance To receive the benefits of this system you must apply continuous brake pedal pressure during the stopping sequence Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer desired Once the brake pedal is released the BAS is deactivated WARNING The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions The BAS cannot prevent accidents including those resulting from ex cessive speed in turns driving on very slip pery surfaces or hydroplaning Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent acci dents The capabilities of a BAS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner that could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others Electronic Stability Program ESP This system enhances directional control and stability of the vehicle under various driving conditions The ESP corrects for oversteering and understeering the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel Engine power may also be reduced to assist in countera
165. e ACEA European Oil Categories for Service Fill Oils use engine oils Categories meeting the requirements of ACEA C3 and approved to MB 229 31 or MB 229 51 SAE 5W 30 engine oil approved to MB 229 31 or MB 229 51 may be used when SAE 5W 20 engine oil is not available Engine Oil 3 5L Engine Non ACEA Use API Certified SAE 10W 30 engine oil meeting Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 and ap Categories proved to MB 229 31 or MB 229 51 Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade Engine Oil 3 5L Engine ACEA Categories For countries that use the ACEA European Oil Categories for Service Fill Oils use SAE 10W 30 engine oil meeting the requirements of ACEA C3 and approved to MB 229 31 or MB 229 51 Engine Oil 3 0L Diesel Engine Use SAE 5W 30 Synthetic Low Ash engine oil meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 11106 and approved to MB 229 31 or MB 229 51 and ACEA C3 Spark Plugs 2 7L Engine TE10MCC5 Gap 0 050 in 1 27 mm Spark Plugs 3 5L Engine ZFR5LP 13G Gap 0 050 in 1 27 mm Spark Plugs 5 7L Engine LZFR5C 11 Gap 0 043 in 1 1 mm Engine Oil Filter 2 7L 3 5L 5 7L Engines MOPAR Engine Oil Filter or equivalent 250 Component Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Engine Oil Filter 3 0L Diesel MOPAR Engine Oil Filter or equivalent Fuel Selection 2 7L Engine 91 Octane Fuel Selection 3 5L and 5 7L Engines 91 Octane Acceptable 95 Octane
166. e HAZARD WARNING FLASHER 206 e IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS 206 e JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING 207 e Jack Location Spare Tire Stowage 207 e Preparations For Jacking 208 e Jacking and Changing a Tire 208 Wheel Cover or Center Cap Installation If Equipped 211 e JUMP STARTING PROCEDURES 212 e FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE lt lt 214 ATOWIEYES 215 e TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE 215 Fron 215 1 216 Without The Ignition Key 216 Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle 216 Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle With A Tow Do eee re 217 HAZARD WARNING FLASHER The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located in the center of the instrument panel between the center air outlets Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning flasher When the switch is activated all directional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an emergency Press the switch a second time to turn off the Hazard Warning flasher This is an emergency warning system and it should not be used when the vehicle is in motion Use it when your vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists When you must leave the vehicle to seek assi
167. e Keyless Entry RKE transmitter or unlock any door The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition switch is turned ON from the LOCK position NOTE None of the courtesy lights will operate if the dimmer control is in the defeat position extreme downward position unless the overhead map reading lights are turned on manually REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RKE The RKE system allows you to lock or unlock the doors open the trunk or activate the Panic Alarm from distances up to approximately 30 ft 9 m using a hand held Key Fob with RKE transmitter The RKE transmitter does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system NOTE Inserting the Key Fob with RKE transmitter into the ignition switch disables all buttons on that RKE transmitter however the but tons on the remaining RKE transmitters will continue to work Driving at speeds 5 mph 8 km h and above disables all RKE trans mitter buttons for all RKE transmitters 021307470 Key Fob with RKE Transmitter To Unlock the Doors Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter once to unlock the driver s door or twice within five seconds to unlock all doors The turn signal lights will flash to ac knowledge the unlock signal The illuminated entry system will also turn on If your vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry refer to Passive Entry System If Equipp
168. e flat tire Turn the lug nuts counterclockwise one turn while the wheel is still on the ground 2 Loosen 5 Place the jack underneath the lift area that is closest to the flat tire Turn the jack screw clockwise to firmly engage the jack saddle with the lift area of the sill flange 209 060503830 Jack Engagement Locations 210 6 Raise the vehicle just enough to remove the flat tire and install the spare tire WARNING Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the vehicle less stable It could slip off the jack and hurt someone near it Raise the vehicle only enough to remove the tire 7 Remove the lug nuts wheel cover if equipped and tire Remove the cover by hand Do not pry it off 8 Mount the spare tire NOTE Do not attempt to install a center cap or wheel cover if equipped on the compact spare However when reinstalling the road tire follow the procedure under Wheel Cover or Center Cap Installation in place of the remaining steps in this procedure 9 Install the lug nuts with the cone shaped end of the nut toward the wheel Lightly tighten the lug nuts To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle is lowered to the ground 10 Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack handle counterclockwise 11 Finish tightening the lug nuts Push down on the wrench while tightening for increased leve
169. e ignition switch is first turned ON and remain on briefly as a bulb check If the light stays on or comes on while driving turn off some of the vehicle s non essential electrical devices or increase en gine speed if at idle If the charging system light remains on it means that the vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging sys tem Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY See an authorized dealer If jump starting is required refer to Jump Starting Procedures in section 6 of this manual 27 Malfunction Indicator Light MIL The Malfunction Indicator Light MIL it is part of an onboard diagnostic sys tem called OBD The OBD system monitors engine and automatic trans mission control systems The MIL will turn on when the key is in the ON position before engine start If the MIL does not come on when turning the key from LOCK to ON have the condition checked promptly Certain conditions such as a loose or missing gas cap poor fuel quality etc may illuminate the MIL after engine start The vehicle should be serviced if the MIL stays on through several of your typical driving cycles In most situa tions the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing CAUTION Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause damage to the engine control system It also could affect fuel economy and drivability If the MIL is flashing severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur Im mediate ser
170. e of the instrument panel Hood Release Lever 2 Move to the outside of the vehicle and push the safety catch to the left The safety catch is located under the center front edge of the hood 818c748d Hood Safety Catch Use the hood prop rod if equipped to secure the hood in the open position WARNING Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your vehicle If the hood is not fully latched it could open when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision Failure to follow this warn ing could result in serious injury or death CAUTION To prevent possible damage do not slam the hood to close it Lower the hood until it is open approximately 6 in 15 cm and then drop it This should secure both latches Never drive your vehicle unless the hood is fully closed with both latches engaged LIGHTS Headlight Switch EA The headlight switch is located on the Cr left side of the instrument panel This L Switch controls the operation of the headlights position lights instrument panel lights instrument panel light dimming interior lights and fog lights Headlight Switch Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent for position light and instrument panel light operation Rotate the switch to the second detent for headlight position light and instrument panel light operation Automatic Headlights If Equipped This system automatically turns the headli
171. e parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disas semble or modify the system Seat belt as semblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged bent retractor torn webbing etc Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage In the driver and front passenger seats the shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or down ward to position the belt away from your neck Push and fully depress the button above the webbing to release the anchorage then move it up or down to the position that fits you best Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt As a guide if you are shorter than average you will prefer a lower position and if you are taller than average you will prefer a higher position When you release the anchorage try to move it up and down to make sure that it is locked in position In the rear seat move toward the center of the seat to position the belt away from your neck Lap Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap shoulder belt 1 Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor point 2 At about 6 to 12 in 15 to 30 cm above the latch plate grasp and twist the belt webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that begins imme diately above the latch plate 3 Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the latch plate 4 Continue to slide the latch plate up until
172. e programming 5 Cycle the ignition after performing steps one to four for the feature to be enabled or disabled 6 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Use the Automatic Door Locks feature in accordance with local laws Automatic Unlock Doors on Exit The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with power door locks if 1 The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is enabled 2 The transmission was in gear and the ve hicle speed returned to O mph 0 km h 3 The transmission is in NEUTRAL or PARK 4 The driver door is opened 5 The doors were not previously unlocked and 6 The vehicle speed is 0 mph 0 km h Automatic Unlock Doors on Exit Programming The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature can be enabled or disabled as follows e For vehicles equipped with the EVIC refer to Unlock Doors Automatically on Exit under Personal Settings Customer Program mable Features in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual 21 e For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following procedure 1 Close all doors and place the Key Fob in the ignition 2 Cycle the ignition switch between OFF and RUN and then back to OFF four times ending up in the OFF position do not start engine 3 Depress the power door UNLOCK switch to unlock the doors 4 A single chime will indicate the completion o
173. e risk of injury in rear side or rollover collisions The Advanced Front Airbags will not deploy in all frontal collisions including some that may produce substantial vehicle damage for example some pole collisions truck under rides and angle offset collisions On the other hand depending on the type and location of impact Advanced Front Airbags may deploy in crashes with little vehicle front end damage but that produce a severe initial deceleration The side airbags will not deploy in all side collisions Side airbag deployment will depend on the severity and type of collision Because airbag sensors measure vehicle de celeration over time vehicle speed and dam age by themselves are not good indicators of whether or not an airbag should have de ployed Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all collisions and also are needed to help keep you in position away from an inflating airbag The ORC monitors the readiness of the elec tronic parts of the system whenever the ignition switch is in the START or RUN position If the key is in the OFF position in the ACC position or not in the ignition the airbags are not on and will not inflate The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may deploy the airbags even if the battery loses power or it becomes discon nected prior to deployment Also the ORC turns on the Airbag Warning Light in the instrument panel for approximately six to eight secon
174. e speed e low road noise e smooth road surface e fully closed windows e dry weather conditions Even though the system is designed for users speaking in European English Dutch French German Italian or Spanish accents the system may not always work for some When navigating through an automated sys tem such as voice mail or when sending a page at the end of speaking the digit string make sure to say Send 71 Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is not in motion is recommended It is not recommended to store similar sound ing names in the uconnect phonebook Phonebook Downloaded and uconnect phone Local name recognition rate is opti mized when the entries are not similar e Numbers must be spoken in single digits 800 must be spoken eight zero zero not eight hundred e You can say O letter O for 0 zero Even though international dialing for most number combinations is supported some Shortcut dialing number combinations may not be supported e In a convertible vehicle system perfor mance may be compromised with the con vertible top down T2 Phone Far End Audio Performance e Audio quality is maximized under e low to medium blower setting e low to medium vehicle speed e low road noise e smooth road surface e fully closed windows e dry weather conditions and e operation from the driver seat e Performance such as audio clarity echo a
175. e stranded off road Do not use tow eyes for tow truck hookup or highway towing You could damage your vehicle Tow straps are recommended when towing the vehicle chains may cause vehicle damage WARNING Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow eyes Tow straps and chains may break caus ing serious injury TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE Tow Hook Front A tow hook bolt located in the glove box is provided with your vehicle It can be attached to the vehicle through an opening in the lower front fascia NOTE The tow hook is used ONLY for towing the vehicle with all four wheels on the ground 8136b82a Tow Hook Opening 215 Insert the flat end of the jack handle through the eye and tighten The tow hook must be fully seated to the attaching bracket through the lower front fascia as shown If the tow hook is not fully seated to the attaching bracket the vehicle should not be towed 061406591 1 Correct No Space 2 Incorrect Space 3 Tow Hook 216 Tow Hook Rear A tow hook anchor is located on the rear of your vehicle The tow hook is used for towing the vehicle with all four wheels on the ground only 8158e53e Tow Hook Anchor Without The Ignition Key Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed with the ignition in the LOCK position The only approved method of towing without the ignition key is with a flatbed truck Proper towing equipment is ne
176. e the following steps Discuss the problem at the authorized dealer with the dealer principal or the service man ager Management personnel at the authorized dealer are in the best position to resolve the problem quickly When you contact the distributor please provide all of the following information e Your name address and phone number e Vehicle Identification Number this 17 digit number is found on an etched plate or label located on the left front corner of the instru ment panel visible through the windshield It is also available from your vehicle registra tion or title Selling and servicing authorized dealer Vehicle s delivery date and current odometer distance 280 e Service history of your vehicle e An accurate description of the problem and the conditions under which it occurs ARGENTINA Chrysler Argentina S A Boulevard Azucena Villaflor 435 C1107Cll Buenos Aires Argentina Tel 54 11 4891 7900 Fax 54 11 4891 7901 AUSTRALIA Chrysler Australia Pacific Pty Ltd ACN 004 411 410 Chrysler Vehicle Division P O Box 4214 Mulgrave 3170 Ph 03 9566 9266 AUSTRIA Chrysler Austria Gesellschaft m b H Felmayergasse 2 A 1210 Wien Tel 43 1 5465 15131 Fax 43 1 5465 15132 BALANCE OF THE CARIBBEAN Interamericana Trading Company Warrens St Michael Barbados West Indies Tel 246 417 8000 Fax 246 425 2888 BELGIUM Chrysler Belgium Luxembourg NV Tollaan 68 B 1200 Brus
177. e washer solution Exhaust System The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly main tained engine exhaust system Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have a competent mechanic inspect the com plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken damaged deteriorated or misposi tioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change Replace as required 232 WARNING Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Breathing it can make you uncon scious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO refer to Exhaust Gas under Safety Tips in Section 2 CAUTION The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only Leaded gasoline will de stroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control device and may seriously reduce engine performance and cause seri ous damage to the engine Under normal operating conditions the cata ytic converter will not require maintenance However it is important to keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst opera tion and p
178. ear when the engine is above idle speed e Before shifting into any gear make sure your foot is firmly on the brake pedal Using Fob With Integrated Key Tip Start NOTE Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal Do not press the accelerator Use the Fob with Integrated Key to briefly turn the ignition switch to the START position and release it as soon as the starter engages The starter motor will con tinue to run and it will disengage automatically when the engine is running If the engine fails to start the starter will disengage automatically in 10 seconds If this occurs turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position wait 10 to 15 sec onds then repeat the Normal Starting proce dure Keyless Go If Equipped This feature allows the driver to operate the ig nition switch with the push of a button as long as the ENGINE START STOP button is installed and the Re 050105203 Mote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter is in the passenger compartment 159 Installing and Removing the ENGINE START STOP Button Installing the Button 1 Remove the key fob from the ignition switch 2 Insert the ENGINE START STOP button into the ignition switch with the lettering facing up and readable 3 Press firmly on the center of the button to secure it into position Removing the Button 1 The ENGINE START STOP button can be remo
179. eat 28 Reminder feed bm Rn 128 Untwisting Procedure 31 Seats sx fed eh vA S a e 79 Adjustment mde a 79 Easy s RE dnx Roms 86 Head Restraints 81 heated ise e at ark kee 82 Height Adjustment 80 Lumbar Support 81 MEMORY 2 de Boe GOES 84 POWER i e ot eges oh ge Le 80 Rear Folding zu xe ww 83 Reclining es m tere Soie ton as 80 Seatback Release 83 ue iet m eet Rcs 80 Selection of Coolant Antifreeze 234 250 Self Sealing Tires 185 Sentry Key Immobilizer 14 Sentry Key Programming 15 Sentry Key Replacement 14 Service Assistance 280 Service Engine Soon Light Malfunction Indicator 130 Setting the Clock 143 Settings Personal 140 SAILING oh aaa ech eae 164 Automatic Transmission 164 166 169 Shoulder Belt Upper Anchorage 31 Shoulder Belts 28 Side Airbag 0 38 Signals TUTO en anes 50 89 125 Slippery Surfaces Driving On 172 Sound System Kiker de 146 Sound Systems Radio 143 Sound Systems Refer to the Sound Systems Booklet Spare Tire 182 183 207 Spark Plugs au nod ina 250 Specifications Fuel Gasoline 250 QM xt
180. ecording you may press the button to stop recording You ceed by saying one of the following com mands Save to save the memo Continue to continue recording Delete to delete the recording Play Memos to play previously recorded memos During the playback you may press the uh button to stop playing memos You proceed by saying one of the following commands Repeat to repeat a memo Next to play the next memo Previous to play the previous memo Delete to delete a memo e Delete All to delete all memos System Setup To switch to system setup say Setup In this mode you may say the following commands e Language German e Language Dutch e Language Italian e Language English e Language French e Language Spanish e Tutorial e Voice Training NOTE Keep in mind that you have to press the amp button first and wait for the beep before speaking the Barge In commands Voice Training For users experiencing difficulty with the sys tem recognizing their voice commands or num bers the uconnect voice Voice Training feature may be used 1 Press the amp button say System Setup and once you are in that menu then say Voice Training This will train your own voice to the System and will improve recognition 2 Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by uconne
181. ect English Espanol Deutsch Italiano Dutch or Francais Then as you continue the information will display in the selected language NOTE The EVIC will not change the uconnect language selection Refer to Language Se lection under uconnect phone in Sec tion 3 Lock Doors Automatically at 15 mph 24 km h When ON is selected all doors will lock auto matically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph 24 km h To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT but ton until ON or OFF appears Unlock Doors Automatically on Exit When ON is selected all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position and the drivers door is opened To make your selec tion press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until ON or OFF appears Remote Key Unlock When Driver Door 1st Press is selected only the driver s door will unlock on the first press of the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter UNLOCK button When Driver Door 1st Press is selected you must press the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passen ger s doors When All Doors 1st Press is se lected all of the doors will unlock on the first press of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until Driver Door 1st Press or All Doors 1st Press appears NOTE If the
182. ed under Door Locks in this section Remote Key Unlock Driver Door All Doors ist Press This feature lets you program the system to unlock either the driver s door or all doors on the first press of the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter To change the current setting proceed as follows e For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC refer to Remote Key Unlock under Personal Set tings Customer Programmable Features under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If Equipped in Section 4 e For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following procedure 1 Press and hold the LOCK button on a pro grammed RKE transmitter for at least 4 sec onds but no longer than 10 seconds Then press and hold the UNLOCK button while still holding the LOCK button 2 Release both buttons at the same time 3 Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by pressing the LOCK UNLOCK buttons on the RKE transmitter with the ignition switch in the OFF position and the key removed 4 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE trans mitter while you are inside the vehicle will activate the security alarm Opening a door with the Vehicle Security Alarm armed will cause the alarm to sound Press the UN LOCK button to deactivate the security alarm Flash Lights with Remote Key Lock
183. ed refer to Synchro nizing ESP see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diag nosed and corrected ESP BAS NOTE e The ESP TCS Indicator Light and the ESP BAS Malfunction Indicator Light will turn on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON posi tion e Each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position the ESP system will be on even if it was turned off previously e The ESP control system will make buzz ing or clicking sounds when it is active This is NORMAL the sounds will stop when ESP becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESP activation TIRES GENERAL INFORMATION Tire Pressure Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle Three primary areas are affected by improper tire pressure Safety WARNING e Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause accidents e Under inflation increases tire flexing and can result in tire over heating and failure Over inflation reduces a tire s ability to cushion shock Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause damage that result in tire failure e Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems You could lose control of your vehicle e Over inflated or under inflated tires can af fect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly resulting in loss of vehicle control Continued WARNING Continue
184. ed Chrysler Dealer T This maintenance is recommended by the manufacturer to the owner but is not required to maintain emissions warranty WARNING You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent mechanic Maintenance Schedule Diesel Engine To help you have the best driving experience possible the manufacturer has identified the specific vehicle maintenance service intervals that are required to keep your vehicle operating properly and safely The manufacturer recommends that these maintenance intervals be performed by your authorized dealer The technicians at your dealer know your vehicle best and have ac cess to factory trained information genuine MOPAR parts and specially designed elec tronic and mechanical tools that can help pre vent future costly repairs The maintenance intervals shown should be performed as indicated in this section 265 NOTE Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 12 500 miles 20 000 km or 12 months whichever comes first At Each Stop for Fuel e Check the engine oil level about 15 minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off Checking the oil level while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level reading Add oil on
185. edal If you do not the vehicle may continue to accel erate beyond the set speed If this occurs e The message DRIVER OVERRIDE will dis play in the EVIC e The system will not be controlling the dis tance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead The vehicle speed will only be deter mined by the position of the accelerator pedal DRIVER OVERRIDE G Y d a n 818e9515 To Cancel The system will disable ACC without erasing the memory if e You softly tap the brake pedal e You depress the brake pedal e You push the speed control lever away from you CANCEL e If the Electronic Stability Program Traction Control System ESP TCS activates LE ONLY ALL CANCELLED Tre To Turn Off The system will turn off and erase the set speed in memory if e You push and release the lever MODE ON OFF e You turn OFF the ignition e You switch OFF the ESP 99 To Resume Speed Push the lever up and release RES ACCEL and then remove your foot from the accelerator pedal The EVIC will display the last set speed WARNING The Resume function should only be used if traffic and road conditions permit Resuming a Set speed that is too high or too low for prevailing traffic and road conditions could cause the vehicle to accelerate or decelerate too sharply for safe operation This could cause an accident and or serious injury To Vary the Speed Setting While A
186. eeds less than approximately 10 mph 16 km h The six Front ParkSense sensors located in the front fascia bumper monitor the area in front of the vehicle that is within the sensors field of view The monitored area seems oval in shape The Front ParkSense sensors can de tect obstacles from approximately 11 8 in 30 cm up to 47 in 120 cm from the front fascia bumper in the horizontal direction de pending on the location and orientation of the obstacle and the type of obstacle 109 Front ParkSense Warning Display The Front ParkSense warning display located on the instrument panel provides both audio and visual warnings to indicate the distance between the front fascia and the detected obstacle 032906727 Front ParkSense LED Display 110 When the ignition switch is turned to the ON position the warning display will turn ON all of its LEDs for about one second Each side of the warning display has six yellow and two red LEDs The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the red LED is ON When the obstacle is detected at a distance of about 47 in 120 cm from the front fascia bumper some of the LEDs of the warning display will be ON As the distance of the detected obstacle to the front fascia oumper decreases more LEDs are illuminated When the warning display has the first red LEDs ON the warning display will actuate an intermittent tone for about 10 seconds The radio will be muted while the tone is a
187. eet off road or frequent trailer towing Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals replace if necessary Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 52 500 Miles 84 000 km or 42 Months Maintenance Service Schedule J Change the engine oil and engine oil filter t 1 Rotate tires Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 258 60 000 Miles 96 000 km or 48 Months Maintenance Service Schedule OOOO C O C Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires Replace the engine air cleaner filter Replace the spark plugs 5 7L Engine Replace the air conditioning filter if equipped Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter if using your vehicle for any of the following police taxi fleet or frequent trailer towing Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Inspect the rear axle fluid Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 67 500 Miles 108 000 km or 54 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter t Rotate tires Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system
188. el to the vehicle when the engine is running e Afire may result if gasoline is pumped into a portable container that is inside of a vehicle You could be burned Always place gas containers on the ground while filling NOTE e Tighten the gas cap until you hear a clicking sound This is an indication that the gas cap is tightened properly The MIL in the instrument cluster may turn on if the gas cap is not secured properly Make sure that the gas cap is tightened each time the vehicle is refueled e When the fuel nozzle clicks or shuts off the fuel tank is full Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap is loose improperly installed or damaged a Check Gascap mes sage will display in the Electronic Vehicle Infor mation Center EVIC if equipped If this oc curs tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the TRIP ODOMETER button to turn off the message If the problem continues the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started A loose improperly installed or damaged fuel filler cap may also turn on the MIL Refer to Onboard Diagnostic System in Section 7 TRAILER TOWING In this section you will find safety tips and information on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with your vehicle Before 195 towing a trailer carefully review this information to tow your load as efficiently and safe
189. engine by pushing or towing the vehicle e Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires disconnected or removed such as when diagnostic testing or for prolonged periods during very rough idling or malfunc tioning operating conditions Cooling System WARNING e When working near the radiator cooling fan disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position OFF position for Keyless Go The fan is temperature controlled and can start at any time the ignition switch is in the ON position RUN position for Keyless Go e You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant antifreeze or steam from your radiator If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator is hot Coolant Checks Check engine coolant antifreeze protection every 12 months before the onset of freezing weather where applicable If the engine cool ant antifreeze is dirty or rusty in appearance the system should be drained flushed and refilled with fresh coolant Check the front of the A C condenser for any accumulation of bugs leaves etc If dirty clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the face of the condenser Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rubber cracking tears cuts and tight ness of the connection at the bot
190. er WICH a ba o 89 Holder x sah ra 117 Holder Cup 117 Hood Release 86 eds tos Re dE oe be eS 13 Os a dot xe le d 12 13 gnition Key Removal 13 lluminated Entry 16 mmobilizer Sentry Key 14 nfant Restraint 41 44 nflation Pressure Tires 129 nterior Fuses nterior Lights ntroduction Jack Location nformation Center Vehicle nside Rearview Mirror nstrument Cluster nstrument Panel and Controls nstrument Panel Lens Cleaning ntegrated Power Module Fuses nterior Appearance Care ntermittent Wipers Delay Wipers Jack Jacking Instructions Jump Starting Key Programming Key Replacement Key Sentry Immobilizer Key In Reminder Keyless Entry System Keyless Go Keys Kicker Sound System Knee Bolster 294 Lane Change and Turn Signals 89 Lap Shoulder Belts 28 LATCH Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren 45 46 Latch Plate 42 kommt 29 LACHES eoo a 0 eA Opes 50 e cg ia sd rane arx 86 Lead Free Gasoline 191 Leaks RWG tras a ae S 50 Life Of TeS s ax 4 a o HAM aes ch i 184 Light Bulbs is su eed ew Ru 50 Lights 2 uu o NU 50 87 Airbag 33 37 40 50 127 AMUIELOGK su
191. er Polska Sp z 0 0 ul Gotlieba Daimlera 1 02 480 Warszawa Tel 801 330 300 PORTUGAL Chrysler Portugal S A Qta da Fonte Edif D Am lia Rua Victor C mara 2 12A 2770 229 Paco de Arcos Portugal Tel 351 0 21 323 91 00 Fax 351 0 21 323 91 99 284 PUERTO RICO AND U S VIRGIN ISLANDS Chrysler International Services S A P O Box 191857 San Juan 009191857 Tel 7877825757 Fax 7877823345 ROMANIA S C Auto Rom S R L Bucuresti Bd Expozitiei nr 2 RO 78334 Tel 01 2240020 25 Fax 01 2241638 RUSSIA Chrysler RUS SAO 39A Leningradsky prospect 125167 Moscow Tel 7 495 745 2600 Fax 7 495 745 2601 SLOVENIA Chrysler Jeep Import d d Leskoskova 2 1122 Ljubljana Tel 01 5843 138 Fax 01 5843 222 SPAIN Chrysler Espa a S L Dpto De Atenci n al Cliente Chrysler Jeep y Dodge Apdo De Correos 24 19200 Azuqueca de Henares Guadalajara Tel 902 888 782 Fax 913 496 529 SWEDEN Chrysler Sverige Bronsyxegatan 14 Box 50530 S 202 50 Malm Tel 46 0 8 752 9858 Fax 46 0 8 752 6483 SWITZERLAND Chrysler Switzerland GmbH Bernstrasse 55 CH 8952 Schlieren Tel e German 0800 80 29 20 e French 0800 80 29 21 e Italian 0800 80 29 22 Telefax 41 0 44 755 64 00 TAIWAN Chrysler Taiwan Co LTD 13th Floor Union Enterprise Plaza 1109 Min Sheng East Road Section 3 Taipei Taiwan R O C Tel 080081581 Fax 886225471871 TURKEY Chrysler Jeep Tic A
192. er hitch utilized Towing Requirements Tires Do not attempt to tow a trailer while usi compact spare tire Proper tire inflation pressures are essen the safe and satisfactory operation of nga ial to your vehicle Refer to Tires General Informa tion in this section for proper tire inf procedures Check the trailer tires for proper tire inf pressures before trailer usage ation ation Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage before towing a trailer Refer to Tires General Information in this section for the proper tire inspection procedures When replacing tires refer to Tires Gen eral Information in this section for proper tire replacement procedures Replacing tires with a higher load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicles GVWR and G limits AWR 199 Towing Requirements Trailer Brakes Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake sys tem or vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer This could cause inad equate braking and possible personal injury When towing a trailer equipped with a hy draulic surge actuated brake system an electronic brake controller is not required Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1 000 Ibs 450 kg and required for trailers in excess of 1 653 Ibs 750 kg CAUTION If the trailer weighs more than 1 000 Ibs 450 kg loaded it should have its own brake
193. eration Slovenia Spain Sweden Switzerland Yugoslavia and United Kingdom Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interfer ence e This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operation VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM IF EQUIPPED The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors for unauthorized entry and the ignition switch and Keyless Go Start Stop button for unauthorized operation If something triggers the alarm the Vehicle Security Alarm will pre vent the vehicle from starting and provide the following audible and visible signals the horn will pulse the headlights park lamps and or turn signals will flash and the Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster will flash Rearming of the System If something triggers the alarm and no action is taken to disarm it the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn off the horn after 29 seconds and turn off all of the visual signals after an additional 31 seconds then the Vehicle Security Alarm will rearm itself To Arm the System Vehicles Not Equipped with Keyless Go Remove the key from the ignition switch and either press a power door LOCK switch while the driver or passenger door is open or press the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter After the last door is closed or if all doors are closed the Vehicle Security Alarm will
194. erous to try to repair any part of the airbag system yourself Be sure to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it has an airbag system Continued 39 WARNING Continued e Do not attempt to modify any part of your advanced airbag system The airbag may inflate accidentally or may not function properly if modifications are made Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any advanced airbag system service If your seat including your trim cover and cushion needs to be serviced in any way including removal or loosening tightening of seat at tachment bolts take the vehicle to your authorized dealer Only manufacturer ap proved seat accessories may be used If it is necessary to modify an advanced airbag system for persons with disabilities contact your authorized dealer Airbag Warning Light O Y You will want to have the airbags ready to inflate for your protection in a collision While the airbag sys tem is designed to be mainte nance free if any of the following 40 occurs have an authorized dealer service the System immediately e The Airbag Warning Light does not come on for approximately six to eight seconds when the ignition switch is first placed into the RUN position e The light remains on after the approximate Six to eight second interval e The light comes on and remains on while driving NOTE If the speedometer tachometer or any en gine related gauge
195. ess ing and holding the FF gt gt button A single press backward lt lt RW or forward FF gt gt will jump backward or forward re spectively for five seconds Use the lt lt SEEK and SEEK gt gt buttons to jump to the previous or next track If the lt lt SEEK button is pressed during the first two seconds of the track it will jump to the previous track in the list if you press this button at any other time in the track it will jump to the beginning of the track If you press the SEEK gt gt button during play mode it will jump to the next track in the list While a track is playing press the INFO button to see the associated metadata art ist track title album etc for that track Pressing the INFO button again jumps to the next screen of data for that track Once you have seen all screens the last INFO button press will take you back to the play mode screen on the radio Pressing the REPEAT button will change the iPod mode to repeat the current playing track Press the SCAN button to use iPod scan mode which will play the first five seconds of each track in the current list and then forward to the next song To stop SCAN mode and start playing the desired track when it is playing the track press the SCAN button again During Scan mode you can also press the lt lt SEEK and SEEK gt gt buttons to select the previous and next tracks RND button available on sales code RES radio only Pres
196. essage will flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10 seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next sched uled oil change interval The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based which 134 means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal driv ing style Unless reset this message will continue to display each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position To turn off the message temporarily press and release the MENU but ton To reset the oil change indicator system after performing the scheduled maintenance refer to the following procedure 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position Do not start the engine 2 Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times within 10 seconds 3 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF LOCK position NOTE If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle the oil change indica tor system did not reset If necessary repeat this procedure Trip Functions Press and release the MENU button until one of the following Trip Functions displays in the EVIC e Average Fuel Economy Fuel Saver Mode e Distance To Empty e Trip A e Trip B e Elapsed Time e Display Units of Measure in Press the SCROLL button to cycle through all the Trip Computer functions The Trip Functions mode displays the following information e Average Fuel Economy Fuel Saver Mode If Equipped
197. estraints will also be equipped with a tether strap a hook for attach ment to the tether strap anchorage and a means of adjusting the tension of the strap You will first loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the tether strap so that you can more easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages Next attach the lower hooks or connectors over the top of the seat cover material Then rotate the tether anchor age cover directly behind the seat where you are placing the child restraint and attach the tether strap to the anchorage being careful to route the tether strap to provide the most direct path between the anchor and the child re straint Finally tighten all three straps as you push the child restraint rearward and down ward into the seat removing slack in the straps according to the child restraint manufacturer s instructions NOTE e Ensure that the tether strap does not slip into the opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack in the strap e When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child restraint please ensure that all seat belts not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out of reach of children It is recommended that before installing the child restraint buckle the seat belt so the seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of reach If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint installation in stead of tucking the seat belt behi
198. etensioners Seat Belts 32 296 Programmable Electronic Features Programming Transmitters Remote Keyless Entry Radial Ply Tires Radiator Cap Coolant Pressure Cap Radio Operation Radio Remote Controls Radio Sound Systems Rain Sensitive Wiper System Rear Cupholder Rear Fog Lights Rear Park Sense System Rear Seat Folding Rear Window De Rear Window Features Rearview Mirrors Reclining Front S Recreational Towi CO O Release Hood Reminder Seat Belt Remote Keyless Remote Sound System Radio Remote Trunk Release Replacement Keys 14 Replacement Parts 225 Replacement Tires 184 Restraint Head 81 Restraints Child 41 Restraints Occupant 27 Rocking Vehicle When Stuck 214 Rotation Tires 185 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle 50 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle 50 Safety Exhaust Gas 49 Safety MPS scisco sas 49 Schedule Maintenance 254 265 Seat Belt Maintenance 241 Seat Belt Reminder 32 Seat Belts 27 28 50 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage lens 31 And Pregnant Women 33 Child Restraint 41 44 47 Front Seat lies 28 29 INSPECHON a x Bday wae 50 Operating Instructions 29 Pretensioners 32 Rear S
199. etup before using To setup press the 4 button and say Setup Breakdown Service and follow prompts Paging To learn how to page refer to Working with Automated Systems Paging works properly except for pagers of certain companies which time out a little too soon to work properly with the uconnect phone Voice Mail Calling To learn how to access your voice mail refer to Working with Automated Systems Working with Automated Systems This method is used in instances where one generally has to press numbers on the cellular 68 phone keypad while navigating through an automated telephone system You can use your uconnect M phone to access a voice mail system or an automated service such as a paging service or automated cus tomer service Some services require immedi ate response selection In some instances that may be too quick for use of the uconnect phone When calling a number with your uconnect phone that normally requires you to enter in a touch tone sequence on your cellular phone keypad you can press the 6 button and say the sequence you wish to enter followed by the word Send For example if required to enter your PIN followed with a pound 3 7 4 6 you can press the ih button and say 3 7 4 6 Send Saying humber or sequence of num bers followed by Send is also to be used for navigating through an automated customer ser vice center menu structure and to leave a nu
200. ever is not in PARK and the ENGINE START STOP button is pressed once the EVIC if equipped will display a Vehicle Not In Park message and the engine will remain running Never leave a vehicle out of the PARK position or it could roll NOTE If the ignition switch is left in the ACC or RUN engine not running position and the transmission is in PARK the system will automatically time out after 60 minutes of inactivity and the ignition switch will switch to the OFF position Keyless Go Functions With Driver s Foot OFF the Brake Pedal Pedal In PARK or NEUTRAL Position The Keyless Go feature operates similar to an ignition switch It has four positions OFF ACC RUN and START To change the ignition switch positions without starting the vehicle and use the accessories follow these steps e Starting with the ignition switch in the OFF position Press the ENGINE START STOP button once to change the ignition switch to the ACC position EVIC displays IGNITION MODE ACCESSORY Press the ENGINE START STOP button a second time to change the ignition switch to the RUN position EVIC displays IGNITION MODE RUN Press the ENGINE START STOP button a third time to return the ignition switch to the OFF position EVIC displays IGNITION MODE OFF Extreme Cold Weather Below 20 F or 29 C To ensure reliable starting at these tempera tures use of an externally powered electric e
201. ew Vehicle Limited Warranty 174 WARNING Driving through standing water limits your vehicle s traction capabilities Do not ex ceed 5 mph 8 km h when driving through standing water Driving through standing water limits your vehicle s braking capabilities which in creases stopping distances Therefore af ter driving through standing water drive slowly and lightly press on the brake pedal several times to dry the brakes e Getting water inside your vehicle s engine can cause it to lock up and stall out and leave you stranded e Failure to follow these warnings may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your passengers and others around you POWER STEERING The standard power steering system will give you good vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces The system will provide mechanical steering capability if power assist is lost If for some reason the power assist is inter rupted it will still be possible to steer your vehicle Under these conditions you will ob serve a substantial increase in steering effort especially at very low vehicle speeds and during parking maneuvers NOTE Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel travel are considered nor mal and do not indicate that there is a problem with the power steering system Upon initial start up in cold weather the power steering pump may make noise for a short amount
202. f the programming 5 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature in accordance with local laws Passive Entry System If Equipped The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the vehicle s Remote Keyless Entry RKE sys tem This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle s door s without having to press the RKE transmitter lock or unlock buttons 22 NOTE e Passive Entry may be programmed ON OFF refer to Passive Entry under Per sonal Settings Customer Programmable Features in the Electronic Vehicle In formation Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual e If a passive entry door handle has not been used for 72 hours the passive entry feature for that handle may time out Also if it has been raining on a passive entry door handle for 24 hours that door han dle s passive entry feature may be deac tivated Pulling the deactivated front door handle will reactivate that door handle s passive entry feature e Hand gloves can affect the Passive Entry door handle unlock sensitivity resulting in a slower response time To Unlock From The Driver s Side With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft 1 5 m of the driver s side of the vehicle grab the front driver door handle to unlock the driver s door automatically NOTE If Unlock All Doors ist Press is pro grammed all d
203. facturer did not supply Nor do they cover the cost of any repairs or adjustments that might be caused or needed because of the installation or use of non manufacturer parts components equipment materials or addi tives Nor do your warranties cover the costs of repairing damage or conditions caused by any changes to your vehicle that do not comply with the manufacturers specifications Original Mopar parts and accessories and other products approved by the manufacturer including qualified advice are available at your authorized dealer When it comes to service remember that your authorized dealer knows your vehicle best has the factory trained technicians and genuine Mopar parts and is interested in your satis faction Copyright 2009 Chrysler International HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section contains the information you de sire Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the items of equipment ordered certain descriptions and illustrations may differ from your vehicle s equipment The detailed index at the back of this Owner s Manual contains a complete listing of all sub jects Consult the following table for a description of the symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this Owner s Manual E OG Ro y E ag 1 ELECTRONIC STABILITY WATER IN FUEL REARWINDOW WINDSHIELD WIPER EXTERIOR BULB TURN SIGNALS UPPER AIR HEATED SEAT DOOR LOCK
204. g Display operation when the system is detecting an obstacle DISPLAY LED OBSTACLE DISTANCE FROM LED COLOR AUDIBLE SIGNAL REAR CORNERS REAR CENTER Inner LED System ON Yellow None 1st LED 59 in 150 cm Yellow Yes 1 2 Second 2nd LED 39 in 100 cm Yellow None 3rd LED 31 5 in 80 cm 31 in 80 cm Yellow None 4th LED 25 5 in 65 cm 26 in 65 cm Yellow None 5th LED 20 in 50 cm 20 in 50 cm Yellow None 6th LED 16 in 40 cm 16 in 40 cm Red Yes Intermittent 7th LED 6 in 15 cm 12 in 30 cm Red Yes Continuous NOTE Front ParkSense will remember the last sys Front ParkSense Sensors The Rear ParkSense system will MUTE the tem state enabled or disabled from the last radio if on when the system is sounding an audio tone if equipped Front ParkSense The Front ParkSense system provides audio and visual indications of the distance between the front fascia oumper and the detected ob stacle when driving forward Refer to the Warn ing Section and Note Section for limitations of this system and recommendations ignition cycle when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position Front ParkSense can be active when the shift lever is in REVERSE or DRIVE If Front Park Sense is enabled the system will be active until the vehicle speed is increased to approxi mately 11 mph 18 km h or above The system will be active again if the vehicle speed is decreased to sp
205. g conditions e This device may not cause harmful interfer ence e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation FUEL REQUIREMENTS GASOLINE ENGINES 2 7L Engine Your vehicle is designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide excellent fuel economy 191 and performance when using high quality un leaded gasoline with an octane rating of 91 The use of premium gasoline is not recom mended as it will not provide any benefit over regular gasoline in these engines 3 5L and 5 7L Engines Your vehicle is designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide excellent fuel economy and performance when using high quality un leaded gasoline having an octane rating of 91 to 95 The manufacturer recommends the use of 95 octane for optimum performance The use of premium gasoline is not recommended as it will not provide any benefit over regular gaso line in these engines Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to your engine However continued heavy spark knock at high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is required Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting stalling and hesitations If you experience these symptoms try another brand of gasoline before considering service for the vehicle 192 Over 40 auto manufacturer s world wide have issued and endorsed consistent gasoline specifications the Worldw
206. g the AutoStick Electronic Range Select ERS mode and selecting a specific gear range frequent shifting can be avoided The highest gear range should be selected that allows for adequate perfor mance For example choose 4 if the de sired speed can be maintained Choose 3 or 2 if needed to maintain the desired Speed Extended driving at high RPM should be avoided to prevent excess heat generation A reduction in vehicle speed may be re quired to avoid extended driving at high RPM Return to a higher gear range or vehicle speed when road conditions and RPM level allows Towing Tips Cooling System To reduce potential for engine and transmission overheating take the following actions City Driving When stopped for short periods shift the trans mission into NEUTRAL but do not increase engine idle speed Highway Driving Reduce speed Air Conditioning Turn off temporarily Trailer Hitch Attaching Points Your vehicle will require extra equipment to tow a trailer safely and efficiently The trailer tow hitch must be attached to your vehicle using the provided attaching points on the vehicle s frame Refer to the following chart to determine the accurate attaching points Other equip ment such as trailer sway controls and braking equipment trailer equalizing leveling equip ment and low profile mirrors may also be required or strongly recommended MOUNTING HOLES ae a al VEHIC
207. ghts on or off according to ambient light levels To turn the system on rotate the headlight switch counterclockwise to the A AUTO position When the system is on the headlight time delay feature is also on This means the headlights will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you place the ignition to the OFF position To turn the 87 automatic system off move the headlight switch out of the AUTO position NOTE The engine must be running before the headlights will come on in the automatic mode Headlights On with Wipers Available with Automatic Headlights Only When this feature is active the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on if the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position In addition the headlights will turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be turned on or off through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC if equipped Refer to Headlights On with Wipers under Per sonal Settings Customer Programmable Fea tures under Electronic Vehicle Information Center in Section 4 88 Headlight Time Delay This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination for up to 90 seconds program mable when leaving your vehicle in an unlit area To activate the delay feature place the ignition in the OFF position while the headlights are still on then turn off
208. he High position full clockwise VERY HOT Set the temperature control to full cool After the hot air is flushed from the vehicle e set the Mode control to Recirculate with A C on and roll up the windows Once you comfortable set the Mode control to Panel or Bi Level H with A C on WARM WEATHER If it s sunny set the Mode control to Panel 4 and turn on A C If it s cloudy or sy dark set the Mode control to Bi Level lt 4 with A C on Adjust Temperature T p control for comfort COOL OR COLD Set the Mode control to Defrost Floor amp or Defrost lt dr dm CONDITIONS Set the Fan Control to the High position full clockwise Adjust Fan and 06 64 Temperature control for comfort if windows are clear 6 0 CL COLD DRY Set the Mode control to Floor A If it s sunny you may want more upper air CONDITIONS In this case set the Mode control to Bi Level 74 In very cold weather if you need extra heat at the windshield set the Mode control to Defrost Floor Jor p Defrost S as needed Adjust Fan and Temperature control for comfort 153 154 156 e Four Speed Automatic Transmission If Equipped e Five Speed Automatic Transmission If Equipped e AUTOSTICK IF EQUIPPED e Operation aa tl ie e DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES ATACA e DRIVING THROUGH WATER Flow
209. heels may change suspension dimen sions and performance characteristics re sulting in changes to steering handling and braking of your vehicle This can cause unpredictable handling and stress to steer ing and suspension components You could lose control and have an accident resulting in serious injury or death Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle e Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity other than what was originally equipped on your vehicle Using a tire with a smaller load index could result in tire overloading and failure You could lose control and have an accident e Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having adequate speed capability can result in sud den tire failure and loss of vehicle control CAUTION Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may result in false speedometer and odometer readings SELF SEALING TIRES IF EQUIPPED A non hardening viscous sealant applied to the inner liner of each tire fills punctures up to 0 19 in 5 mm to minimize the loss of air pressure This contributes to the safety of the vehicle by significantly reducing the probability of a roadside stop due to a flat tire TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at different loads and perform different steering driving and braking functions For these reasons they wear at unequal rates and tend to
210. hicle operation by disabling the engine The system does not need to be armed or activated Operation is automatic regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked The system uses Key Fob with factory mated Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter and Wireless Ignition Node WIN to prevent unau thorized vehicle operation Therefore only Key Fobs that are programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle The system will not allow the engine to crank if an invalid Key Fob is used to start and operate the vehicle After placing the ignition switch in the RUN position the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a bulb check If the light remains on after the bulb check it indicates that there is a problem with the electronics This condition will result in the engine being shut off after two seconds If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal vehicle operation vehicle running for longer than 10 seconds it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics Should this occur have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by an authorized dealer NOTE The Sentry Key Immobilizer System is not compatible with aftermarket remote starting systems Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of secu rity protection All of the Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electronics Replacement Keys NOTE
211. hicle through the trunk and opens any door the alarm will sound e When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed the interior power door lock switches will not unlock the doors The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to pro tect your vehicle however you can create conditions where the Vehicle Security Alarm will give you a false alarm If one of the previously 16 described arming sequences has occurred the Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether you are in the vehicle or not If you remain in the vehicle and open a door the alarm will sound If this occurs disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery becomes disconnected the Vehicle Se curity Alarm will remain armed when the battery is reconnected The exterior lights will flash the horn will sound and the ignition will not start the vehicle If this occurs disarm the Vehicle Se curity Alarm Vehicles Equipped with Keyless Go Either press the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter or grasp the Passive Entry Unlock Door Handle refer to Passive Entry under Door Locks in this Section for more informa tion press the Keyless Go Start Stop button requires at least one valid Key Fob in the vehicle or insert a valid Key Fob into the ignition switch if the Start Stop button is re moved and rotate it to the RUN position ILLUMINATED ENTRY The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the Remot
212. honebook entries cannot be deleted or edited List All uconnect Phonebook Names e Press the te button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook List Names e The uconnect phone will play the names of all the phonebook entries including the downloaded phonebook entries if available e To call one of the names in the list press the t button during the playing of the desired name and say Call NOTE The user can also exercise Edit or Delete operations at this point The uconnect phone will then prompt you as to the number designation you wish to call e The selected number will be dialed Phone Call Features The following features can be accessed through the uconnect M phone if the feature s are available on your cellular service plan For example if your cellular service plan provides three way calling this feature can be accessed through the uconnect phone Check with your cellular service provider for the features that you have Answer or Reject an Incoming Call No Call Currently in Progress When you receive a call on your cellular phone the uconnect phone will interrupt the vehicle audio system if on and will ask if you would like to answer the call Press the 4 button to accept the call To reject the A press and hold the amp button until you hear a single beep indicating that the incoming call was rejected Answer or Reject a
213. hrysler Group LLC such investiga tions may be requested by customers insurance carriers government officials and professional crash researchers such as those associated with universities and with hospital and insurance organizations n the event that an investigation is undertaken by Chrysler Group LLC regardless of initia tive the company or its designated represen tative will first obtain permission of the appro priate custodial entity for the vehicle usually the vehicle owner or lessee before accessing the electronic data stored unless ordered to download data by a court with legal jurisdiction i e pursuant to a warrant A copy of the data will be provided to the custodial entity upon request General data that does not identify particular vehicles or crashes may be released for incorporation in aggregate crash data bases such as those maintained by the gov ernment officials and various states Data of a potentially sensitive nature such as would identify a particular driver vehicle or crash will be treated confidentially Confidential data will not be disclosed by Chrysler Group LLC to any third party except when 1 Used for research purposes such as to match data with a particular crash record in an aggregate database provided confidentiality of personal data is thereafter preserved 2 Used in defense of litigation involving a Chrysler Group LLC product 3 Requested by police under a legal warra
214. hts Press ing the switch a third time will deactivate the rear fog lights and a fourth time will deactivate the front fog lights Turning the headlight switch off will also deactivate the fog lights An indicator light in the instrument cluster illu minates when the fog lights are turned on NOTE The front fog lights will activate automati cally when turning on the position lights or the low beam headlights if previously deac tivated by turning the headlight switch off The rear fog lights will only turn on by Operating the switch as previously de scribed Multifunction Lever The multifunction lever controls the operation of the turn signals headlight beam selection and passing lights The multifunction lever is lo cated on the left side of the steering column 031507267 Multifunction Lever Turn Signals Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights If either light remains on and does not flash or there is a very fast flash rate check for a defective outside light bulb If an indicator fails to light when the lever is moved it would suggest that the indicator bulb is defective NOTE A Turn Signal On message will appear in the EVIC if equipped and a continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile 1 6 km with either turn signal on Lane Change As
215. hts in each switch indicate the level of heat in use Two indicators will illuminate for High one for Low and none for Off af Press the switch once to select High level heating Press the switch a second time to select Low level heating Press the switch a third time to shut the heat ing elements Off If the High level heating is selected the system will automatically switch to Low level heating after approximately 30 minutes of continuous operation At that time the number of indicators illuminated changes from two to one indicating the change Operation on the Low level setting also turns Off automatically after approximately 30 minutes NOTE Once a heat setting is selected heat will be felt within two to five minutes WARNING e Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes spinal cord injury medi cation alcohol use exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise care when using the seat heater It may cause burns even at low temperatures especially if used for long periods of time Continued WARNING Continued e Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against heat such as a blanket or cushion This may cause the seat heater to overheat Sitting in a seat that has been overheated could cause serious burns due to the increased surface temperature of the seat CAUTION Repeated overheating of the seat could da
216. iate service is required Loose Fuel Filler Cap fthe vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap is loose improperly installed or damaged a gASCAP message will appear in the odometer or a Check Gascap message will display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC if equipped If this occurs tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the TRIP ODOMETER button to turn off the mes sage If the problem continues the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started A loose improperly installed or damaged fuel filler cap may also turn on the MIL REPLACEMENT PARTS Use of genuine MOPAR parts for normal scheduled maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to ensure the designed perfor mance Damage or failures caused by the use of non MOPAR parts for maintenance and repairs will not be covered by the manufactur er s warranty MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES The pages that follow contain the required maintenance services determined by the engi neers who designed your vehicle Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed maintenance schedule there are other components which may require servicing or replacement in the future 225 CAUTION e Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or perform repairs and service when neces sary could result in more costly repairs damage to other components or negatively impact vehicle performance Immediately have potenti
217. icle What Causes Corrosion Corrosion is the result of deterioration or re moval of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle The most common causes are e Road salt dirt and moisture accumulation e Stone and gravel impact e Insects tree sap and tar e Salt in the air near seacoast localities e Atmospheric fallout industrial pollutants Washing e Wash your vehicle regularly Always wash your vehicle in the shade using MOPAR Car Wash or a mild car wash soap and rinse the panels completely with clear water e If insects tar or other similar deposits have accumulated on your vehicle use MOPAR Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover or equivalent to remove e Use a high quality cleaner wax such as MOPAR Cleaner Wax or equivalent to re move road film stains and to protect your paint finish Take care never to scratch the paint e Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish CAUTION Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning mate rials such as steel wool or scouring powder that will scratch metal and painted surfaces Special Care If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive near the ocean hose off the undercar riage at least once a month Itis important that the drain holes in the lower edges of the doors rocker panels and trunk be kept clear and open If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint
218. icle must be in PARK to recall memory positions If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not in PARK a mes sage will display in the EVIC if equipped e The driver s seat belt must be unbuckled to recall memory positions To recall the memory settings for driver one press MEMORY button number 1 on the driv er s door or the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked to memory position 1 To recall the memory setting for driver two press MEMORY button number 2 on the driv er s door or the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked to memory position 2 A recall can be cancelled by pressing any of the MEMORY buttons S 1 or 2 on the driver s door during a recall When a recall is cancelled the driver seat side mirror adjustable pedals if equipped and power tilt and telescopic steer ing column if equipped stop moving A delay of one second will occur before another recall can be selected 85 Easy Entry Exit Seat Available with Memory Seat Only This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle The distance the driver seat moves depends on where you have the driver seat positioned when you remove the Key Fob from the ignition or change the ignition to OFF for vehicles equipped with Keyless e When you remove the Key Fob from the ignition or change the ignition to OFF for vehicles equipped with Keyless Go the
219. ide Fuel Charter WWFC which define fuel properties necessary to deliver enhanced emissions performance and durability for your vehicle The manufac turer recommends the use of gasolines that meet the WWFC specifications if they are avail able Ethanol The manufacturer recommends that your ve hicle be operated on fuel containing no more than 10 ethanol Purchasing your fuel from a reputable supplier may reduce the risk of ex ceeding this 1096 limit and or of receiving fue with abnormal properties It should also be noted that an increase in fuel consumption Methanol Methyl or Wood Alcoho concentrations when b gasoline You may find more methanol along wi cosolvents Problems methanol gasoline or E is used in a variety of lended with unleaded fuels containing 3 or h other alcohols called hat result from using 85 ethanol blends are not the responsibility of the manufacturer While TBE is an oxygenate made from methanol it does not have the nega ive effects of methanol should be expected when using ethanol CAUTION or E85 ethanol Use result in starting and dri DO NOT use gasolines containing methanol of these blends may veability problems and may damage critical fuel system components blended fuels due to the lower energy conten of ethanol Problems that result from using methanol gasoline or E85 ethanol blends are not the responsibility of the manufacturer While TBE is
220. ignature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 268 37 500 Miles 60 000 km or 36 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J Rotate tires If using your vehicle in dusty or off road conditions inspect the engine air cleaner filter and replace if necessary 1 Inspect the brake linings and replace if necessary Replace the air conditioning filter if equipped 1 Inspect the rear axle fluid 43 750 Miles 70 000 km or 42 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 4 Rotate tires Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 269 50 000 Miles 80 000 km or 48 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires Replace the engine air cleaner filter Replace the fuel filter water separator unit Inspect the brake linings and replace if necessary Replace the air conditioning filter if equipped Inspect the exhaust system Inspect the CV joints Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals and replace if necessary Change the rear axle fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes
221. ild restraint The automatic lock ing retractor is activated by first attaching the child seat then pulling all of the webbing out of the retractor then allowing the webbing to retract back into the retractor Tighten webbing To release simply unbuckle the seat belt by depressing the button allowing the webbing to retract into the retractor In the rear seat you may have trouble tighten ing the lap shoulder belt on the child restraint because the buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path opening on the restraint Discon nect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short buckle end belt several times to shorten it Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the release button facing out If the belt still can t be tightened or if pulling and pushing on the restraint loosens the belt you may need to do something more Discon nect the latch plate from the buckle turn the buckle around and insert the latch plate into the buckle again If you still can t make the child restraint secure try a different seating position 47 To attach a child restraint tether strap 1 Rotate the cover over the anchor directly behind the seat where you are placing the child restraint Tether Strap Mounting A Tether Strap Hook B Tether Anchor 1 Cover 3 Attaching Strap 2 Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path for the strap between the anchor and the child seat 48
222. ill remain active for up to 60 minutes after the ignition switch is turned OFF Opening a vehicle door will cancel this feature To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until Off 45 sec 5 min 10 min 30 min or 60 min appears AWD System Displays When in this display you may select ON or OFF When ON is selected the EVIC displays the current mode of the transfer case A five second display appears any time the transfer case changes from All Wheel Drive AWD to Rear Wheel Drive RWD or from RWD to AWD The EVIC also displays the current mode of the transfer case when you shift into drive or re verse To make your selection press and re lease the FUNCTION SELECT button until ON or OFF appears Confirmation of Voice Commands If Equipped When ON is selected all voice commands from the uconnect system are confirmed To make your selection press and release the FUNC TION SELECT button until ON or OFF ap pears Park Assist System If Equipped When ON is selected the system will scan for objects behind the vehicle when the transmis sion is in the reverse or neutral position To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until ON or OFF appears Display ECO If Equipped The ECO message is located in the Compass Temperature display this message
223. imedia radio s User s Manual separate booklet uconnect phone section uconnect phone is a voice activated hands free in vehicle communications system uconnect phone allows you to dial a phone number with your cellular phone using simple voice commands e g Call Jim Work or Dial 151 1234 5555 Your cellular phone s audio is transmitted through your vehicle s au dio system the system will automatically mute your radio when using the uconnect phone uconnect phone allows you to transfer calls between the uconnect phone and your cellu lar phone as you enter or exit your vehicle and enables you to mute the uconnect phone s microphone for private conversation The uconnect phone is driven through your Bluetooth Hands Free profile cellular phone uconnect phone features Bluetooth technol ogy the global standard that enables different 59 electronic devices to connect to each other without wires or a docking station so uconnect phone works no matter where you stow your cellular phone be it your purse pocket or briefcase as long as your phone is turned on and has been paired to the vehicle s uconnect phone The uconnect phone al lows up to seven cellular phones to be linked to the system Only one linked or paired cellular phone can be used with the uconnect phone at a time The uconnect phone is available in English Dutch French German Italian
224. imited to e Driving style e Tire pressure e Distance driven WARNING Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six years regardless of the remaining tread Failure to follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure You could lose control and have an accident resulting in serious injury or death Keep dismounted tires in a cool dry place with as little exposure to light as possible Protect tires from contact with oil grease and gaso line Replacement Tires The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many characteristics They should be in spected regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure The manufacturer strongly recommends that you use tires equivalent to the originals in size quality and performance when replacement is needed Refer to the paragraph on Tread Wear Indicators Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard for the size designation of your tire The service description and load identification will be found on the original equipment tire Failure to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the safety handling and ride of your vehicle We recommend that you contact your original equipment or an authorized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire speci fications or capability WARNING Do not use a tire wheel size or rating other than that specified for your vehicle Some combinations of unapproved tires and w
225. ine Refer to Normal Starting Diesel Engines under Starting Procedures in Section 5 for more information 12 Anti Lock Brake ABS Light This light monitors the Anti Lock Brake System ABS The light will turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and may stay on for as long as four seconds If the ABS Light remains on or turns on while driving then the Anti Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and service is re quired However the conventional brake sys tem will continue to operate normally if the Brake Warning Light is not on If the ABS Light is on the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti Lock brakes If the ABS Light does not turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position have the light in spected by an authorized dealer Refer to Anti Lock Brake System under Brake Sys tem in Section 5 for more information 13 Electronic Stability Program ESP Brake Assist System BAS Malfunction Indicator Light The yellow Electronic Stability Pro gram ESP Brake Assist System BAS Malfunction Indicator Light will turn on when the key in the ignition switch is turned to the ON position The light should go out with the engine running The system will turn this light on continuously while the engine is running if it detects a malfunction in either the ESP the BAS or both ESP BAS
226. ing Rising Shallow Standing Water e Power Steering Fluid Check MULTI DISPLACEMENT SYSTEM MDS IF EQUIPPED 57L ENGINE ONIY e as a a scons PARKING BRAKE oo eae ae e ANTI LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM e ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM e Anti Lock Brake System ABS e Traction Control System TCS e Brake Assist System BAS e Electronic Stability Program ESP Synchronizing ESP Eee e ESP BAS Malfunction Indicator Light and ESP TCS Indicator 180 e TIRES GENERAL INFORMATION 181 OUEST oe sae 181 e Tire Inflation Pressures 181 e Tire Pressures for High Speed Operation 182 Radial Ply Tires 182 Compact Spare Tire If Equipped 182 e Limited Use Spare If Equipped 183 e Mire Spinning oe as o aa e e e a 183 e Tread Wear Indicators 184 CHOG S 184 IGS 184 SELF SEALING TIRES IF EQUIPPED 185 e TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS 185 TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM TPMS 186 e Base System oe c em asa c EE SEE
227. ing in the EVIC graphic to the vehicles recommended cold placard pressure inflation value Once the system re ceives the updated tire pressures the system will automatically update the graphic display in the EVIC will stop flashing and the TPM Telltale Light will turn off The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information 189 Check TPMS Warning If a system fault is detected the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid The system fault will also sound a chime In addition the EVIC will dis play a CHECK TPM SYSTEM message for three seconds and then display dashes in place of the pressure value to indicate which sensor is not being received Tire PSI 39 zm 81979401 If the ignition switch is cycled this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still ex ists If the system fault no longer exists the TPM Telltale Light will no longer flash and the CHECK TPM SYSTEM message will no longer display and a pressure value will display in 190 place of the dashes A system fault can occur due to any of the following 1 Signal interference due to electronic de vices or driving next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPM sensors 2 Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains materials that may block radio wave signals 3 Accumulation of snow
228. ing the gas cap place the gas cap tether cable over a hook on the inside of the fuel door This keeps the gas cap sus pended away from and protects the vehicle s surface Gas Cap Tether Hook 4 Rotate the ignition key back to the left to remove 5 To replace the cap insert it into the filler neck and tighten to the right until at least three clicks are heard CAUTION e Damage to the fuel system or emissions control system could result from using an improper fuel tank filler tube cap gas cap e A poorly fitting gas cap could let impurities into the fuel system e A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL to turn on e To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling do not top off the fuel tank after filling When the fuel nozzle clicks or shuts off the fuel tank is full WARNING e Remove the fuel tank filler tube cap gas cap slowly to prevent fuel spray from the filler neck which may cause injury Continued WARNING Continued e The volatility of some gasolines may cause a buildup of pressure in the fuel tank that may increase while you drive This pres sure can result in a spray of gasoline and or vapors when the cap is removed from a hot vehicle Removing the cap slowly allows the pressure to vent and prevents fuel spray e Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when the gas cap is re moved or the tank filled e Never add fu
229. ining Breakdown service list phones work call main menu return to main menu yes cancel mobile confirmation prompts confirmation mute on continue mute off delete new entry dial no VOICE RECOGNITION VR SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED Voice Recognition VR System Operation e This Voice Recognition system al lows you to control your AM FM radio disc player and a memo recorder NOTE Take care to speak into the Voice Interface System as calmly and normally as possible The ability of the Voice Interface System to recognize user voice commands may be negatively affected by rapid speaking or a raised voice level WARNING Any voice commanded system should be used only in safe driving conditions following local laws and phone use All attention should be kept on the roadway ahead Failure to do so may result in an accident causing serious injury or death When you press the ih button you will hear a beep The beep is your signal to give a com mand NOTE If you do not say a command within a few seconds the system will present you with a list of options If you ever wish to interrupt the system while it lists options press the iS button listen for the beep and say your command Pressing the me button while the system is Speaking is known as barging in The system will be interrupted and after the beep you can add or change commands This will become helpful once you start to learn the o
230. inst accidentally moving a mirror position NOTE For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory Seat you can use your Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter or the memory switch on the driver s door trim panel to return the power mirrors to pre programmed positions Refer to Driver Memory Seat in this section Power Folding Mirrors If Equipped Turn the power mirror knob rearward all the way to the left or to the right to fold in the mirrors Turn the knob forward to either the left mirror position the right mirror position or the off center position to unfold the mirrors Power Folding Mirror Knob Both mirrors will always move together and will fold anytime the knob is turned accordingly The ignition does not have to be in the RUN position Heated Mirrors If Equipped These mirrors are heated to melt frost 56 or ice This feature is activated when ever you turn on the rear window de froster Refer to Rear Window Features in this section for further information Illuminated Vanity Mirrors If Equipped An illuminated vanity mirror is located on the sun visor To use the mirror rotate the sun visor downward and swing the mirror cover upward The light turns on automatically Closing the mirror cover turns off the light Illuminated Vanity Mirror uconnect phone IF EQUIPPED NOTE For uconnect phone with Navigation or Multimedia radio refer to the Navigation or Mult
231. ion have your authorized dealer check the transmission fluid level CAUTION Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer s recommended fluid may cause deterioration in transmission shift quality and or torque converter shudder Using a transmission fluid other than that recommended by the manufacturer will re sult in more frequent fluid and filter changes Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in this section for the cor rect fluid type Continued 237 CAUTION Continued e The fluid level is preset at the factory and it does not require adjustment under normal operating conditions If a transmission fluid leak occurs visit your authorized dealer immediately Severe damage to the trans mission may occur Your authorized dealer has the proper tools to adjust the fluid level accurately Fluid and Filter Changes Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Sec tion 8 for the proper maintenance intervals If the transmission is disassembled for any reason the fluid and filter should be changed Selection of Lubricant It is important that the proper lubricant is used in the transmission to assure optimum transmis sion performance Use only manufacturer s rec ommended transmission fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in this section for the correct fluid type It is important that the transmission fluid be maintained at the pre scribed level using the
232. ipers off when driving through an automatic car wash Damage to the windshield wipers may result if the wiper switch is left in any position other than off Intermittent Wiper System Use the intermittent wiper when weather con ditions make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause between cycles desirable Ro tate the end of the multifunction lever to select the desired delay interval There are six delay settings which allow you to regulate the wipe interval from a minimum of one cycle every second to a maximum of approximately 23 sec onds between cycles Windshield Washers To use the washer push the multifunction lever inward toward the steering column to the second detent and hold it for as long as washer spray is desired If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper control is in the delay range the wipers will operate for two or three wipe cycles after releasing the lever and then resume the inter mittent interval previously selected f you activate the washer while the windshield wiper is turned off the wipers will operate for three wipe cycles and then turn off WARNING Sudden loss of visibility through the wind shield could lead to an accident You might not see other vehicles or other obstacles To avoid sudden icing of the windshield during freezing weather warm the windshield with the de froster before and during windshield washer use Mist Feature Push the multifunction
233. ire do not drive more than 50 mph 80 km h Keep inflated to the cold tire inflation pressure listed on either your tire placard or limited use spare tire and wheel assembly Replace or repair the original tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle control Tire Spinning When stuck in mud sand snow or ice condi tions do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping when you are stuck WARNING Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or failure A tire could explode and injure someone Do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h or for more than 30 seconds continuously when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the speed 183 Tread Wear Indicators Tread wear indicators are in the original equip ment tires to help you in determining when your tires should be replaced 055007576 1 Worn Tire 2 New Tire These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread grooves They will appear as bands when the tread depth becomes 1 16 in 2 mm When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the tire should be replaced 184 Life of Tire The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including but not l
234. ire including the spare if provided should be checked e monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recom mended by the vehicle manufac turer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS that illuminates a low tire pres sure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated Accordingly when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pres sure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale 129 Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly The TPMS malfunction in
235. irror If Equipped This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from vehicles behind you You can turn the feature on or off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror A light next to the button will illuminate to indicate when the dimming feature is activated 1 Automatic Dimming Mirror 030406002 CAUTION To avoid damage to the mirror during clean ing never spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean Outside Mirrors To receive maximum benefit adjust the outside mirror s to center on the adjacent lane of traffic and a slight overlap of the view obtained from the inside mirror NOTE The passenger side convex outside mirror will give a much wider view to the rear and especially of the lane next to your vehicle 57 WARNING Vehicles and other objects seen in the pas senger side convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are Relying too much on your passenger side convex mirror could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other object Use your inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror Outside Mirrors Folding Feature If Equipped Some models have exterior mirrors that are hinged The hinge allows the mirror to pivot forward and rearward to resist damage The hinge has three detent positions full forward ful
236. is above 25 mph 40 km h When the system is turned on and in the READY state the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC displays ACC READY When the system is OFF the EVIC displays CRUISE OFF NOTE You cannot enable ACC under the following conditions e When you apply the brakes e When the parking brake is set e When the automatic transmission is in PARK REVERSE or NEUTRAL e When the Electronic Stability Program ESP is switched off e When pressing the RES ACCEL switch without a previously set speed in memory To Activate Push the speed control lever inward toward the steering column and release MODE ON OFF The ACC menu in the EVIC displays ACC READY ACC READY G T8 A ua To turn the system OFF push the lever inward toward the steering column again and re lease At this time the system will turn off and the EVIC will display CRUISE OFF WARNING Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control ACC system on when not in use is dangerous You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want You could lose control and have an accident Always leave the system OFF when you are not using it To Set a Desired Speed When the vehicle reaches the speed desired push the lever down and release SET DECEL The EVIC will display the set speed ALL SET 60 MPH TYE Ai sum Remove your foot from the accelerator p
237. is indicated Have the brake sys tem serviced by an authorized dealer imme diately ncreased vehicle stabi ing severe braking cond ock up ANTI LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM The Anti Lock Brake System ABS provides ity and brake perfor mance under most braking conditions The system automatically pumps the brakes dur itions to prevent wheel The Electronic Brake Force Distribution EBD prevents the rear wheels provides greater contro from over braking and of available braking forces applied to the rear axle When the vehicle is driven over 7 mph 11 km h you may also hear a slight clicking sound as well as some related motor noises These noises are the system performing its self check cycle to ensure that the ABS is working properly This self check occurs each time the vehicle is started and accelerated past 7 mph 11 km h ABS is activated during braking under certain road or stopping conditions ABS inducing conditions can include ice snow gravel bumps railroad tracks loose debris or panic stops You also may experience the following when the brake system goes into Anti Lock e The ABS motor running it may continue to run for a short time after the stop e The clicking sound of solenoid valves e Brake pedal pulsations and e A slight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the end of the stop These are all normal characteristics of ABS WARNING e The ABS contains
238. it clears the folded webbing Automatic Locking Retractors ALR Mode If Equipped In this mode the shoulder belt is automatically pre locked However the belt will still retract to remove slack in the shoulder belt 31 When to Use the Automatic Locking Mode Use the Automatic Locking Mode any time a child safety seat is installed in a rear seating position Children 12 years old and younger should be properly restrained in the rear seat whenever possible How to Engage the Automatic Locking Mode 1 Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt 2 Grasp the shoulder portion and pull down ward until the entire belt is extracted 3 Allow the belt to retract As the belt retracts you will here a clicking sound This indicates the safety belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode How to Disengage the Automatic Locking Mode Disconnect the combination lap and shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to disen gage the Automatic Locking Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive emergency locking mode 32 Seat Belt Pretensioners If Equipped The seat belts for both front seating positions may be equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to remove any slack from the seat belts in the event of a collision These devices improve the performance of the seat belt system by assuring that the belt is tight around the occupant in a collision Pretension ers work for all size occupants including th
239. itter Remote Keyless Entry RRE leo ea xev RO X ES 16 Transporting Pets 48 Tread Wear Indicators 184 Trip Odometer 125 128 Trunk Lid Deck 26 27 Trunk Release Emergency 27 Trunk Release Remote Control 26 T r signals s uS 89 125 UCI 143 uconnect Hands Free Phone 59 Universal Child Seat Position Chart 42 Universal Consumer Interface UCI Connector 143 Unleaded Gasoline 191 Untwisting Procedure Seat Belt 31 Vanity Mirrors 00 59 Variance Compass 138 Vehicle Identification Number VIN 7 Vehicle Modifications Alterations 7 Vehicle Storage 152 245 Viscosity Engine Oil 228 Voice Recognition System VR 77 Wait to Start Light 126 Warning Flasher Hazard 206 Warnings and Cautions 7 Washer Adding Fluid 231 Washers Headlight 92 Washers Windshield 91 231 Washing Vehicle 239 Water Driving Through 173 Wheel and Wheel Trim 239 Wheel and Wheel Trim Care 239 Wind Buffeting 26 115 Window Fogging 152 3333333 ndoWS dow Wat Aaa EE aed 25 ROWED dus ke a eck A ea 25 indshield Defroster 50 151 indshield Washers
240. iven at high speeds maintain ing correct tire inflation pressure is very impor tant Increased tire pressure and reduced ve hicle loading may be required for high speed vehicle operation Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds loading and cold tire inflation pressures WARNING High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum load is dangerous The added strain on your tires could cause them to fail You could have a serious accident Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capac ity at continuous speeds above 75 mph 120 km h Radial Ply Tires WARNING Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly The instability could cause an accident Always use radial ply tires in sets of four Never combine them with other types of tires Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in the tread area because of sidewal flexing Consult your authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs Compact Spare Tire If Equipped The compact spare is for temporary emer gency use with radial tires It is engineered to be used on your style vehicle only Since this tire has limited tread life the original tire should be repaired or replaced and reinstalled at the first opportunity WARNING Temporary use spare tires are for emergency use only With these tires do not drive m
241. l Za md er key 192 Exhaust Gas Caution 49 232 Exhaust System 49 232 Exterior Folding Mirrors 58 Exterior Lighting 87 Exterior Lights zs mom 50 Filters Air 228 Air Conditioning 152 230 Engine Oil 228 250 Engine Oil Disposal 228 Flashers Hazard Warning 206 Turn Signal 50 89 125 Flash To Pass 89 Flat Tire Changing 207 Flooded Engine Starting 161 Floor Console 117 Fluid Brake uuum Pee Rex 252 Fluid Capacities 249 Fluid Leaks io ee Sa ede ia AS 50 Fluid Level Checks Automatic Transmission 237 Brake ay ae qus 236 Cooling System Engine Oil ize owas a 8 226 Power Steering 175 FUIS em mjor oe ee FR ew 250 Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts 250 deg ake o A ds 125 126 Fog Lights Rear 88 Folding RearSeat 83 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle 214 Euel Qa aye emm RP epa 191 193 194 Additives 193 Conserving 134 Diesel s aus ace tds 193 250 Ethanol 1 a eee a 192 Filler Cap Gas Cap 194 Gasoline 2x d ios ee a 191 Gauge lx 129 Octane Rating 191 250 Requireme
242. l this feature The time for this feature is programmable Refer to Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit under Per sonal Settings Customer Programmable Features in the Electronic Vehicle Infor mation Center EVIC If Equipped in Section 4 WARNING Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leav ing unattended children in a vehicle is danger ous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Do not leave the Key Fob in the ignition or a vehicle equipped with Keyless Go in the ACC or RUN mode A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle CAUTION An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves Always remove the Key Fob from the ignition and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended Key In Ignition Reminder Opening the driver s door when the Key Fob is in the ignition and the ignition switch position is OFF or ACC sounds a signal to remind you to remove the Key Fob 13 NOTE The Key In Ignition reminder only sounds when the Key Fob is placed in the OFF or ACC ignition position If your vehicle is equipped with Keyless Go opening the driver s door when the vehicle s ignition switch is placed in ACC or RUN engine stopped will cause the reminder chime to sound For more information refer to Keyless Go If Equipped in Section 5 SENTRY KEY The Sentry Key Immobilizer System prevents unauthorized ve
243. l X ISOFIX position not suitable for ISOFIX Front seat must be placed in the mid track ndicate the vehicle specific ISOFIX child re travel position or forward of this position with the seat back in the vertical position 43 Infants and Child Restraints e Safety experts recommend that children ride rearward facing in the vehicle until they are at least one year old and weigh at least 20 Ibs 9 kg Two types of child restraints can be used rearward facing infant carriers and convertible child seats The infant carrier is only used rearward facing in the vehicle It is recommended for children who weigh up to about 20 Ibs 9 kg Convertible child seats can be used either rearward facing or forward facing in the ve hicle Convertible child seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearward facing direction than infant carriers do so they can be used rearward facing by children who weigh more than 20 Ibs 9 kg but are less than one year old Both types of child re straints are held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system Refer to LATCH Child Seat Anchorage System Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren in this section 44 WARNING Rearward facing child seats must NEVER be used in the front seat of a vehicle with the front passenger airbag unless the airbag is turned off An airbag deployment could cause severe injury or death to infants in this position
244. l brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning Light which will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has dropped below a specified level The light will remain on until the cause is corrected NOTE The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering maneuvers which change fluid level conditions The vehicle should have service performed and the brake fluid level checked If brake failure is indicated immediate repair is necessary WARNING Driving a vehicle with the brake light on is dangerous Part of the brake system may have failed It will take longer to stop the vehicle You could have an accident Have the vehicle checked immediately Vehicles equipped with the Anti Lock Brake System ABS are also equipped with Elec tronic Brake Force Distribution EBD In the event of an EBD failure the Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS Light Immediate repair to the ABS system is re quired Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the RUN position The light should illuminate for approximately two sec onds The light should then turn off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected If the light does not illuminate have the light inspected by an authorized dealer The light also will turn on when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the RUN position 127 NOTE
245. l filter water separator unit Inspect the brake linings and replace if necessary Replace the air conditioning filter if equipped Inspect the rear axle fluid 21 Inspect the exhaust system Inspect the CV joints 21 Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals and replace if necessary J Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 81 250 Miles 130 000 km or 78 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Rotate tires Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 272 87 500 Miles 140 000 km or 84 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J Rotate tires If using your vehicle in dusty or off road conditions inspect the engine air cleaner filter and replace if necessary 1 Inspect the brake linings and replace if necessary Replace the air conditioning filter if equipped 93 750 Miles 150 000 km or 90 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Rotate tires Inspect the rear axle fluid Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 273 L D D
246. l rearward and normal Driver s Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped The drivers outside mirror will automatically adjust for glare from vehicles behind you This feature is controlled by the inside automatic dimming mirror and can be turned on or off by pressing the button at the base of the inside 58 mirror The mirror will automatically adjust for headlight glare when the inside mirror adjusts Tilt Mirrors In Reverse If Equipped Tilt Mirrors in Reverse tilts the outside rearview mirrors downward when the ignition is in the RUN position and the transmission is shifted nto REVERSE This feature provides the driver with a better view of the ground and vehicle in the area of the rear tires when backing up The mirrors will move back to their previous position when the transmission is shifted out of RE VERSE Tilt Mirrors in Reverse can be enabled or dis abled through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC if equipped Refer to Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 Power Mirrors The power mirror switch is located on the driver s door trim panel next to the power door lock switch A rotary knob selects the left mirror right mirror or off position Power Mirror Control After selecting a mirror move the knob in the same direction you want the mirror to move Use the center off position to guard aga
247. lant de a ails Ade a ae E a ER 4 48 Al inue dee vive hh Beas i 143 Antifreeze 234 249 250 Bulb Replacement 246 Coin Holder uses 117 Corrosion Protection 238 Bulbs Light s n 50 245 Cold Weather Operation 161 Cruise Control Speed Control 94 96 Compact Disc CD Maintenance 147 Cruise Light sss 125 Calibration Compass 138 Compact Spare Tire 182 Cupholders 117 241 Capacities Fluid 249 Compass 24 1 ela ad 137 Customer Assistance 280 Caps Filler Compass Calibration v 138 FUL ee a aa di 194 Compass 138 Deck Lid Emergency Release 27 Oil Engine 227 Computer Trip Travel 134 Deck Lid Power Release 26 Power Steering 175 Connector Defroster Rear Window 119 Radiator Coolant Pressure 235 UCI REEL 143 Defroster Windshield 50 151 CarWashes 239 Universal Consumer Interface UCI 143 Delay Intermittent Wipers 91 Carbon Monoxide Warning 49 Conserving 134 Diagnostic System Onboard 225 Cellular Phone 59 148 Console Floor 117 Diesel Fuel 193 250 Changing A Flat Tire 207 Console Overhead 113 Dimmer Switch Headlight
248. ld also be seriously injured or killed Always fasten your seat belt prop erly and make sure all passengers are also properly secured e Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof Never allow your fingers other body parts or any object to project through the sunroof opening Injury may result Opening Sunroof Express Press the switch rearward and release and the sunroof will open automatically from any posi tion The sunroof will open fully and then stop automatically This is called Express Open During Express Open operation any move ment of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof Closing Sunroof Express Press the switch forward and release and the sunroof will close automatically from any posi tion The sunroof will close fully and stop auto matically This is called Express Close Dur ing Express Close operation any movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof Pinch Protect Feature This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of the sunroof during Express Close operation If an obstruction in the path of the sunroof is detected the sunroof will automati cally retract Remove the obstruction if this occurs Next press the switch forward and release to Express Close Pinch Protect Override If a known obstruction ice debris etc pre vents closing press the switch forward and hold for two seconds after the reversal occurs This allows the sunroof t
249. les equipped with an auto matic transmission cannot be started this way Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic con verter and once the engine has started ignite and damage the converter and vehicle If the vehicle has a discharged battery booster cables may be used to obtain a start from another vehicle This type of start can be dan gerous if done improperly so follow this proce dure carefully WARNING Failure to follow these warnings could result in personal injury or death e Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever the hood is raised It can start anytime the ignition is placed in the RUN position You can be injured by the fan e Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution that can cause serious burns do not allow battery fluid to contact eyes skin or cloth ing Wear safety glasses and protect your eyes at all times If acid splashes in your eyes or on your skin flush contaminated area immediately with large quantities of water e Abattery generates hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive Keep flame or spark away from the vent holes Don t lean over battery when attaching clamps or al low the clamps to touch each other Continued WARNING Continued Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source that has a greater than 12 Volt system i e do not use a 24 Volt power source e The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that should not be disconnected and sho
250. less and odorless Breathing it can make you uncon scious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO follow these safety tips Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or out of the area If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running adjust your heating or cooling controls to force outside air into the vehicle Set the blower at high speed If you are required to drive with the trunk liftgate open make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set at high speed DO NOT use the recirculation mode The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly main tained engine exhaust system Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have a competent mechanic inspect the com plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken damaged deteriorated or misposi tioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change Replace as required 49 Safety Checks You Should Make Inside the Vehicle Seat Belts Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays
251. lever inward toward the steering column to the first detent to activate a single wipe cycle to clear off road mist or spray from a passing vehicle The wipers will continue to operate until you release the lever Headlights On with Wipers Available with Automatic Headlights Only When this feature is active the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on if the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position In addition the headlights will turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be enabled or disabled Refer to Headlights On with Wipers under Personal Settings Cus tomer Programmable Features under Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center in Section 4 Rain Sensing Wipers If Equipped This feature senses moisture on the windshield and automatically activates the wipers for the driver This feature is especially useful for road 91 splash or over spray from the windshield wash ers of the vehicle ahead Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to one of the six intermittent wiper settings to activate this feature The sensitivity of the system is adjustable from the multifunction lever Wiper delay position 1 is the least sensitive and wiper delay position 6 is the most sensitive Choose setting 3 or 4 for normal rain conditions Choose setting 2 or 1 if you desire less wiper sensitivity
252. lorless and odorless gas which can kill Never run the engine in a closed area such as a garage and never sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running for an extended period If the ve hicle is stopped in an open area with the engine running for more than a short pe riod adjust the ventilation system to force fresh outside air into the vehicle e Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance Have the exhaust system inspected every time the vehicle is raised Have any abnormal conditions re paired promptly Until repaired drive with all side windows fully open Continued WARNING Continued e Keep the trunk liftgate closed when driving your vehicle to prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous exhaust gases from entering the vehicle FUEL REQUIREMENTS DIESEL ENGINES Use good quality diesel fuel from a reputable supplier For most year round service No 2 diesel fuel meeting ASTM specification D 975 Grade 515 will provide good performance If the vehicle is exposed to extreme cold below 20 F or 7 C or is required to operate at colder than normal conditions for prolonged periods use climatized No 2 diesel fuel or dilute the No 2 diesel fuel with 50 No 1 diesel fuel This will provide better protection from fuel gelling or wax plugging of the fuel filters This vehicle is fully compatible with biodiesel blends up to 5 biodiesel meeting ASTM specification D 975 193 CAUTION
253. ltiple numbers for each phonebook entry if de sired e When prompted recite the phone number for the phonebook entry that you are adding After you are finished adding an entry into the phonebook you will be given the opportunity to add more phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the main menu The uconnect phone will allow you to enter up to 32 names in the phonebook with each name having up to four associated phone numbers and designations Each language has a sepa rate 32 name phonebook accessible only in that language In addition if equipped and supported by your phone uconnect phone automatically downloads cellular phone s phonebook Phonebook Download Automatic Phonebook transfer from Cellular Phone If equipped and specifically supported by your phone uconnect phone automatically down loads names text names and number entries from the cellular phone s phonebook Specific Bluetooth Phones with Phone Book Access Profile may support this feature See uconnect website for supported phones e To call a name from downloaded or uconnect Phonebook follow the proce dure in Call by Saying a Name section e Automatic download and update if sup ported begins as soon as the phone Bluetooth wireless connection is made to the uconnect phone For example after you start the vehicle e Maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be downloaded and updated every time a phone is
254. lumination Device Brown Stoplights Red Left Rear Position Side Marker Lights and Rear Registration Plate Illumination Device Black 13 Pin Connector 81789d61 Pin Number Function Wire Color Right Rear Position Side Marker Lights and Rear Regis tration Plate Illu mination Device Brown Stoplights Red Left Rear Position Side Marker Lights and Rear Regis tration Plate Illu mination Device Black Reverse lights Red Black The rear position registration plate illumina tion device shall be connected such that no light of the device has a common connection with both pins 5 and 7 Permanent Power Supply 12V Brown White Pin Function Wire Color Number 1 Left Turn Signal Yellow 2 Rear Fog Light Blue de Ground Common White Return for Contacts Pins 1 and 2 and 4 to 8 4 Right Turn Signal Green 10 Power Supply Controlled by Ignition Switch 12V Red 117 Return for Contact Pin 10 White 201 Pin Function Wire Color Number 12 Reserve for Fu Red Blue ture Allocation 137 Return for White Contact Pin 9 Note The allocation pin 12 has been changed from Coding for coupled Trailer to Reserve for Future Allocation The three return circuits shall not be con nected electrically in the trailer The rea
255. lure to follow this warning may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your passengers and others around you Shallow Standing Water Although your vehicle is capable of driving through shallow standing water consider the following Caution and Warning before doing so CAUTION e Always check the depth of the standing water before driving through it Never drive through standing water that is deeper than the bottom of the tire rims mounted on the vehicle e Determine the condition of the road or the path that is under water and if there are any obstacles in the way before driving through the standing water Do not exceed 5 mph 8 km h when driving through standing water This will minimize wave effects Continued 173 CAUTION Continued e Driving through standing water may cause damage to your vehicle s drivetrain compo nents Always inspect your vehicle s fluids i e engine oil transmission transaxle axle etc for signs of contamination i e fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance after driving through standing water Do not continue to operate the vehicle if any fluid appears contaminated as this may result in further damage Such damage is not cov ered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty e Getting water inside your vehicle s engine can cause it to lock up and stall out and cause serious internal damage to the en gine Such damage is not covered by the N
256. ly as possible To maintain warranty coverage follow the re quirements and recommendations in this manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing Common Towing Definitions The following trailer towing related definitions will assist you in understanding the following information Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle This includes driver passengers cargo and tongue weight The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR Gross Trailer Weight GTW The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all cargo consumables and equip ment permanent or temporary loaded in or on the trailer in its loaded and ready for operation condition The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale The entire weight of the trailer must be supported by the scale 196 Gross Combination Weight Rating GCWR The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle and trailer when weighed in com bination NOTE The GCWR rating includes a 150 Ibs 68 kg allowance for the presence of a driver Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR WARNING It is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR A dangerous driving
257. ly when the level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark e Check the windshield washer solvent and add if required Once a Month e Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or damage e Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals as required 266 e Check the fluid levels of the coolant reser voir brake master cylinder and power steer ing add as needed e Check all lights and other electrical items for correct operation At Each Oil Change e Change the engine oil filter e Inspect the brake hoses and lines e Inspect for the presence of water in the fuel filter water separator unit CAUTION Failure to perform the required maintenance items may result in damage to the vehicle Required Maintenance Intervals Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the ollowing pages for the required maintenance intervals 6 250 Miles 10 000 km or 6 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Rotate tires Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 12 500 Miles 20 000 km or 12 Months Maintenance Service Schedule a a a Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires If using your vehicle in dusty or off road conditions inspect the engine air cleaner filter and replace if necessary Inspect the brake linings and replace if necessary Replace the air conditioning filter if equipped Inspect the exh
258. m age the heating element and or degrade the material of the seat Folding Rear Seat The rear seatbacks can be folded forward to provide an additional storage area Pull on the loops shown in the illustration to fold down either or both seatbacks These loops can be tucked away when not in use Folding Rear Seats When the seatback is folded to the upright position make sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the seatback above the seat strap WARNING e Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into position If the seatback is not securely locked into position the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and or passengers An improperly latched seat could cause serious injury Continued 83 WARNING Continued e The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle with the rear seatbacks in the locked up or folded down position should not be used as a play area by children when the vehicle is in motion They could be seriously in jured in an accident Children should be seated and using the proper restraint sys tem DRIVER MEMORY SEAT IF EQUIPPED This feature allows the driver to store up to two different memory profiles for easy recall through a memory switch Each memory profile contains desired position settings for the driver seat side mirrors adjustable pedals if equipped and power tilt and telescopic steer ing column if equipped and
259. m is On the steering wheel buttons can be used to select the Map or Menu display on the Navigation Unit When the Menu display is ac tive the SCROLL button can be used to scroll through the list the FUNCTION SELECT button can be used to select an item and the AUDIO MODE button can be used to return to the previous menu When the Map display is active pressing the FUNCTION SELECT button will change the Navigation Unit Display to the Menu 140 Turn by Turn Directions The EVIC displays turn by turn directions to a programmed destination when Turn by Turn Navigation is enabled through Personal Set tings When enabled the EVIC displays the name of the approaching road at the top of the screen followed by an arrow to indicate the direction to turn the vehicle and a count down to indicate the distance to the turn NOTE Refer to your Navigation User s Manual for detailed operating instructions Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features Personal Settings allows the driver to set and recall features when the transmission is in PARK Press and release the MENU button until Per sonal Settings displays in the EVIC Use the SCROLL button to display one of the following choices Language When in this display you may select one of six languages for all display nomenclature includ ing the trip functions and the uconnect gps if equipped Press the FUNCTION SELECT but ton while in this display to sel
260. mber on a pager You can also send stored uconnect phone book entries as tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager entries To use this feature dial the number you wish to call and then press the 6 button and say Send The system will prompt you to enter the name or number and say the name of the phonebook entry you wish to send The uconnect phone will then send the corresponding phone num ber associated with the phonebook entry as tones over the phone NOTE e You may not hear all of the tones due to cellular phone network configurations this is normal e Some paging and voice mail systems have system time out settings that are too short and may not allow the use of this feature Barge In Overriding Prompts The Voice Recognition button can be used when you wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice recognition command imme diately For example if a prompt is asking Would you like to pair a phone clear a you could press the 6 button and say Pair Phone to select that option without having to listen to the rest of the voice prompt Turning Confirmation Prompts On Off Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system from confirming your choices e g the uconnect phone will not repeat a phone number before you dial it e Press the to button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Confirmations The uconnect phone
261. me and the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid In addition the EVIC will display a CHECK TPM SYSTEM text mes sage and the graphic will display in place of four tire pressure values Upon the next ignition switch cycle the TPMS will no longer chime or turn on the TPM Telltale Light or display the text message in the EVIC However the graphic will still display To reactivate the TPMS first replace all four wheel and tire assemblies road tires with those equipped with TPM sensors Then drive the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h The TPMS will chime the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 sec onds the EVIC will display a CHECK TPM SYSTEM text message and the graphic will display tire pressure values to show that the TPMS is receiving sensor data General Information Transmitter and receivers operate on a carrier frequency of 433 92 MHz as required by EEC regulations These devices must be certified to conform to specific regulations in each indi vidual country Two sets of regulations are involved ETS European Telecommunication Standard 300 220 which most countries use and German BZT federal regulation 2252125 which is based on ETC 300 220 but has addi tional unique requirements Other defined re quirements are noted in ANNEX VI of COMMIS SION DIRECTIVE 95 56 EC Operation is subject to the followin
262. mi nated If the problem has been momentary the trans mission can be reset to regain all forward gears To reset the transmission use the follow ing procedure 1 Stop the vehicle Move the shift lever to the PARK position Turn the engine off Wait approximately 10 seconds ae nm Restart the engine 6 Move the shift lever to the desired range If the problem is no longer detected the trans mission will return to normal operation If the transmission cannot be reset see your authorized dealer NOTE Even if the transmission can be reset we recommend that you visit your authorized dealer at your earliest possible conve nience Your authorized dealer has diagnos tic equipment to determine if the problem could recur Have the transmission checked at your autho rized dealer as soon as possible AutoStick Electronic Range Select ERS Your vehicle may be equipped with AutoStick or Electronic Range Select ERS to provide greater driver control of automatic transmission operation Refer to AutoStick in this section Electronic Range Select ERS If Equipped Electronic Range Select ERS allows the driver to limit the highest available transmission gear providing you with more control of the vehicle ERS allows you to maximize engine braking eliminate undesirable upshifts and improve overall vehicle performance This system can also provide you with more control during moun
263. mportant for turbocharged charge air cooled engines 163 ENGINE BLOCK HEATER IF EQUIPPED Gasoline Engine The engine block heater warms the engine and permits quicker starts in cold weather Connect the cord to a standard 110 115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a grounded three wire extension cord The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood on the driver side of the vehicle It has a removable cap that is located on the driver side of the Integrated Power Module Diesel Engine The optional diesel engine block heater warms engine coolant and permits quicker starts in cold weather Use the heater when tempera tures below O F 18 C are expected to last for several days The block heater must be plugged in at least one hour to have an ad equate warming effect on the coolant 164 WARNING Remember to disconnect the cord before driv ing Damage to the electrical cord could cause electrocution AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION CAUTION Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed e Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop e Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine is at idle speed e Do not shift from REVERSE PARK or NEUTRAL into any forward gear when the engine is above idle speed Before shifting into any gear make sure your foot is firmly on the brake pedal WARNING
264. n Incoming Call Call Currently in Progress If a call is currently in progress and you have another incoming call you will hear the same network tones for call waiting that you normally hear when using your cellular phone Press the o button to place the current call on hold and answer the incoming call NOTE The uconnect phone compatible phones in the market today do not support rejecting an incoming call when another call is in progress Therefore the user can only an swer an incoming call or ignore it 65 Making a Second Call While Current Call in Progress To make a second call while you are currently on a call press the t button and say Dial or Call followed by the phone number or phone book entry you wish to call The first call will be on hold while the second call is in progress To go back to the first call refer to Toggling Between Calls To combine two calls refer to Conference Call Place Retrieve a Call From Hold To put a call on hold press the button until you hear a single beep This indicates that the call is on hold To bring the call back from hold press and hold the 2 button until you hear single beep Toggling Between Calls If two calls are in progress one active and one on hold press the button until you hear a single beep indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls have switched Only one call can be placed on hold at one time 66 Co
265. n the interior trim but they will open during airbag deployment The system includes sensors adjacent to both front and rear seat occupants that are cali brated to deploy the SABIC airbags during impacts that require airbag occupant protec tion WARNING e If your vehicle is equipped with left and right Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain SABIC do not stack luggage or other cargo up high enough to block the location of the SABIC The area where the side curtain airbag is located should remain free from any ob structions Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects between you and the side airbags the performance could be adversely af fected and or objects could be pushed into you causing serious injury Along with seat belts and pretensioners Ad vanced Front Airbags work with the knee bol sters to provide improved protection for the driver and front passenger Side airbags also work with seat belts to improve occupant pro tection Knee Impact Bolsters The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the driver and the front passenger and position everyone for the best interaction with the Advanced Front airbag Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying airbag Children 12 years old and younger should always ride buckled up in a rear seat WARNING Infants in rear facing child restraints should NEVER ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a
266. n the instrument cluster CAUTION e ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to recognize every obstacle includ ing small obstacles Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not detected at all Obstacles located above or below the sen sors will not be detected when they are in close proximity e The vehicle must be driven slowly when using ParkSense to be able to stop in time when the obstacle is detected It is recom mended that the driver looks over his her shoulder when using ParkSense WARNING e Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using ParkSense Always check carefully behind your vehicle look behind you and be sure to check for pe destrians animals other vehicles obstruc tions and blind spots before backing up You are responsible for safety and must continue to pay attention to your surround ings Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death Continued WARNING Continued e Before using ParkSense it is strongly recommended that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly is disconnected from the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for towing Failure to do so can result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles be cause the hitch ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the rear fascia when the warning display turns the red LEDs ON Also the ParkSense sensors could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assembly depending on its
267. n use the seat belts throughout their pregnancy Keeping the mother safe is the best way to keep the baby safe Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the abdomen That way the strong bones of the hips will take the force if there is a collision Supplemental Restraint System SRS Airbags This vehicle has airbags for both the driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems The driver s front airbag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel The passenger s front airbag is mounted in the instrument panel above the glove compart ment The words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the airbag covers 022605385 Front Airbag Components 1 Airbags 2 Knee Bolsters NOTE These airbags are certified to regulations for Advanced Airbags The Advanced Front Airbags have a multistage inflator design This allows the airbag to have different rates of inflation based on the severity and type of collision This vehicle may also be equipped with Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains SABIC to protect the driver front and rear passengers sitting next to a window If the vehicle is equipped with SABIC airbags they are located above the side windows and their covers are also labeled SRS AIRBAG This vehicle may also be equipped with Supple mental Side Seat Airb
268. nd Confirmation Entry Deleted Current Number is played Enter New Number Entry is modified Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined Enter Number Phonebook Cleared New Entry Added 81c6bf80 Voice Tree Setup Setup Service Toggle Pair List Phones New phone Select a language Confirmation will temporarily Prompts on off Say 4 digit override pin code Phones S phone elect phone nih to be deleted List Phones priorities Enter Name of phone and follow prompts to complete pairing Phone Deleted System System Lists confirms Phones All Phones Deleted Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 030605582 75 Voice Commands Voice Commands Voice Commands 76 Primary Alternate s Primary Alternate s Primary Alternate s zero download pager beeper one Dutch Nederlands pair a phone two edit phone pairing pairing three emergency phonebook phonebook four English previous five delete all erase all redial six Espanol select phone select seven Francais send eight German Deutsch set up phone settings or nine help phone set up asterisk star home transfer call plus Italian Italiano uconnect Tutorial hash language try again all all of them list names voice training system tra
269. nd increased emissions Brake System In order to assure brake system performance all brake system components should be in spected periodically Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 for the proper mainte nance intervals WARNING Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly an accident Driving with your foot resting or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures excessive lining wear and possible brake damage You would not have your full braking capacity in an emergency Master Cylinder Brake Fluid Level Check Check the fluid level in the master cylinder immediately if the brake system warning light indicates system failure Check the fluid level in the master cylinder when performing underhood services Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing the cap Add fluid to bring the level up to the MAX mark on the side of the master cylinder reservoir Add enough fluid to bring the level up to the requirements described on the brake fluid res ervoir With disc brakes fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear How ever low fluid level may be caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed Use only manufacturer s recommended brake luid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in this section for the correct fluid type WARNING e Use only manufacturers recommended brake fluid Refer to Fluids Lubric
270. nd loudness to a large degree rely on the phone and network and not the uconnect phone e Echo at the phone far end can sometimes be reduced by lowering the in vehicle audio volume e In a convertible vehicle system perfor mance may be compromised with the con vertible top down Bluetooth Communication Link Cellular phones have been found to lose con nection to the uconnect phone When this happens the connection can generally be re established by switching the phone off on Your cellular phone is recommended to remain in Bluetooth ON mode Power Up After switching the ignition key from OFF to either ON or ACC position or after a language change you must wait at least 15 seconds prior to using the system Voice Tree Main Menu Breakdown English UConnect EN Espanol A E Tutorial Francais German Italian Dutch Last Enter Enter Number Name Number on Phone is redialed See Phonebook Flowchart See Setup Flowchart Number associated Number The 32 name language specific phonebook will be used The phones paired are available across all languages with entry is Dialed is dialed Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 030609126 74 Voice Tree Phonebook New Entry Enter Name Phonebook Entries Listed one Enter Name at a time 1st Confirmation Enter Location Enter Location Enter Location 2
271. nd the child restraint route the seat belt through the child restraint belt path and then buckle it This should stow the seat belt out of the reach of an inquisitive child Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and should not be played with and never leave your child unattended in the vehicle WARNING Improper installation of a child restraint to the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the manufactur er s directions exactly when installing an in fant or child restraint Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt The passenger seat belts are equipped with either cinching latch plates or Automatic Lock ing Retractors ALRs which are designed to keep the lap portion tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip Pulling up on the shoulder portion of the lap shoulder belt will tighten the belt The cinching latch plate will keep the belt tight however any seat belt system will loosen with time so check the belt occasionally and pull it tight if necessary The seat belt must be in the Automatic Locking Mode in order to enable a child restraint to be tightly installed Refer to Automatic Locking Mode in this section A locking clip should not be necessary once the automatic locking fea ture is enabled Position the shoulder and lap belt on the ch
272. nd the wheels or wheel housings 4 Using tire chains on the vehicle 5 Using wheels tires not equipped with TPM sensors 188 Vehicles with Full Size Spare 1 The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly has a TPM sensor that can be moni tored by the TPMS 2 If you install the full size spare in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit upon the next ignition switch cycle a chime will sound and the TPM Telltale Light will turn ON 3 Driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h will turn off the TPM Telltale Light as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires Vehicles with Compact Spare 1 The compact spare tire does not have a TPM sensor Therefore the TPMS will not moni tor the pressure in the compact spare tire 2 If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit upon the next igni tion switch cycle a chime will sound and the TPM Telltale Light will turn ON 3 After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid 4 For each subsequent ignition switch cycle a chime will sound and the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid 5 Once you repair or replace the origin
273. nds e Radio to switch to the radio mode e Disc to switch to the disc mode 78 e Memo to switch to the memo recorder e System Setup to switch to system setup Radio AM or Radio Long Wave or Radio Medium Wave If Equipped To switch to the AM band say AM or Radio In this mode you may say the following commands e Frequency to change the frequency e Next Station to select the next station e Previous Station to select the previous station e Radio Menu to switch to the radio menu e Main Menu to switch to the main menu Radio FM To switch to the FM band say FM or Radio FM In this mode you may say the following commands e Frequency to change the frequency e Next Station to select the next station e Previous Station to select the previous station e Radio Menu to switch to the radio menu e Main Menu to switch to the main menu Disc To switch to the disc mode say Disc In this mode you may say the following commands e Track to change the track e Next Track to play the next track e Previous Track to play the previous track e Main Menu to switch to the main menu Memo To switch to the voice recorder mode say Memo In this mode you may say the follow ing commands e New Memo to record a new memo During the r
274. nference Call When two calls are in progress one active and one on hold press and hold the button until you hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call Three Way Calling To initiate three way calling press the ih but ton while a call is in progress and make a second phone call as described under Mak ing a Second Call While Current Call in Progress After the second call has estab lished press and hold the button until you hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call Call Termination To end a call in progress momentarily press the o button Only the active call s will be terminated and if there is a call on hold it will become the new active call If the active call is terminated by the phone far end a call on hold may not become active automatically This is cell phone dependent To bring the call back from hold press and hold the o button until you hear a single beep Redial e Press the o button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Redial e The uconnect phone will call the last num ber that was dialed from your cellular phone NOTE This may not be the last number dialed from the uconnect phone Call Continuation Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the uconnect phone after the vehicle ignition key has been switched to OFF Call co
275. nflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability e The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure gauge even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPM Telltale Light e Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in the tire Base System The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure lev els Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the receiver module NOTE It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to maintain the proper pressure The TPMS consists of the following compo nents e Receiver module e Four TPM sensors and e TPM Telltale Light The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly if equipped has a TPM sensor The matching full size spare can be used in place of any of the four road tires The TPMS will only monitor the pressure in the full size spare when it is used in place of a road tire Otherwise a spare with a pressure below the low pre
276. ngine block heater available from your autho rized dealer is recommended If Engine Fails To Start WARNING e Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start the vehicle This could result in a flash fire causing serious per sonal injury Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has started ignite and damage the converter and vehicle If the vehicle has a discharged battery booster cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery in another vehicle This type of start can be dangerous if done improperly Refer to Section 6 for proper jump starting proce dures and follow them carefully Clearing a Flooded Engine Using ENGINE START STOP Button If the engine fails to start after you have fol lowed the Normal Starting or Extreme Cold Weather procedures it may be flooded To clear any excess fuel press and hold the brake pedal push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it then press and release the ENGINE START STOP button once The starter motor will engage automatically run for 10 sec onds and then disengage Once this occurs release the accelerator pedal and the brake pedal wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the Norm
277. nstrument panel Door Latches Check for positive closing latching and lock ing Fluid Leaks Check area under vehicle after overnight park ing for fuel engine coolant oil or other fluid leaks Also if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel power steering fluid or brake fluid leaks are suspected the cause should be located and corrected immediately 52 LIGHTS ENSE ENTER T eHeadlight Switch oi ees Automatic Headlights If Equipped Headlights On with Wipers Available with Automatic Headlights Only siHeadlight mime Delay ieee series e Automatic Headlight Leveling If Equipped e Lights On Reminder ca eres eed cea e Fog Lights If Equipped e Multifunction Lever Overhead Console Map Reading Lights untenonubighise rrr WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS e Intermittent Wiper System e Windshield Washers e Mist Feat re Headlights On with Wipers Available with Automatic Headlights Only e Rain Sensing Wipers If Equipped HEADLIGHT WASHERS IF EQUIPPED POWER TILT TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN IF EQUIPPED a SS 54 Normal Fixed Speed Cruise Control Mode 106 e PARKSENSE FRONT AND REAR PARK ASSIST 108 eRea
278. nt 4 Otherwise required by law Data parameters that are recorded e Diagnostic trouble code s and warning light status for electronically controlled safety systems including the airbag system e Vehicle speed e Engine RPM e Brake switch status e Pedal position e And other parameters depending on vehicle configuration Child Restraints Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the time including babies and children Children 12 years and younger should ride properly buckled up in a rear seat if available According to crash statistics children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front WARNING In a collision an unrestrained child even a tiny baby can become a projectile inside the ve hicle The force required to hold even an infant on your lap could become so great that you could not hold the child no matter how strong you are The child and others could be badly injured Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child s size There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult safety belt Always check the child seat Owner s Manual to ensure you have the correct seat for your child Use the restraint that is correct for your child 41 Universal Child Seat Position Chart Age Group Seating Position Front Passenger
279. nt cluster Refer to Instrument Cluster in Section 4 of this manual It will glow for two to ten seconds or more depending on engine temperature When the Wait To Start Light goes out the engine is ready to start 4 Tip Start Feature Do not press the accelerator Use the Fob with Integrated Key FOBIK to briefly turn the igni tion switch to the START position and then release it The starter motor will continue to run and it will automatically disengage when the engine is running If the engine fails to start the starter will disengage automatically in 20 sec onds The starter can be disengaged by turn ing the ignition switch to the OFF position if required 5 After the engine starts allow it to idle for approximately 30 seconds before driving This allows oil to circulate and lubricate the turbo charger Avoid prolonged idling in ambient tempera tures below O F 18 C Long periods of idling may be harmful to your engine because com bustion chamber temperatures can drop so low that the fuel may not burn completely Incom plete combustion allows carbon and varnish to form on piston rings and injector nozzles Also the unburned fuel can enter the crankcase diluting the oil and causing rapid wear to the engine Engine Warm Up Avoid full throttle operation when the engine is cold When starting a cold engine bring the engine up to operating speed slowly to allow the oil pressure to stabilize as the
280. nt or equivalent Power Steering Reservoir Rear Axle 252 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE Maintenance Schedule Gasoline Engine The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for sched uled maintenance On Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC equipped vehicles Oil Change Re quired will be displayed in the EVIC and a single chime will sound indicating that an oil change is necessary On Non EVIC equipped vehicles Change Oil will flash in the instrument cluster odometer and a single chime will sound indicating that an oil change is necessary 254 The oil change indicator message will illumi nate approximately 7 000 miles 11 200 km after the most recent oil change was per formed Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible within 500 miles 800 km However an earlier oil change at 3 000 miles 5 000 km may be required if the vehicle is operated under Severe Duty Conditions later in this section NOTE The oil change indicator message will not monitor the time since the last oil change Change your vehicle s oil if it has been six months since your last oil change even if the oil change indicator message is NOT illuminated e Change your engine oil more often if you drive your vehicle off road for an ex tended period of time e Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 7 500 miles 12 000 km or
281. ntenance items e Always keep the sensor clean Carefully wipe the sensor lens with a soft cloth Be cautious not to damage the sensor lens Do not remove any screws from the sensor or the sensor mount Doing so could cause an ACC system malfunction or failure and re quire a sensor realignment If the sensor is damaged due to an accident see your authorized dealer for service Do not attach or install any accessories near the sensor including transparent material or aftermarket grilles Doing so could cause an ACC system failure or malfunction When the condition that deactivated the system is no longer present the system will return to the CRUISE OFF state and will resume func tion by simply reactivating it 104 NOTE Installing a vehicle front end protector or an aftermarket grille or modifying the grille is not recommended Doing so may block the sensor and inhibit ACC operation ACC Unavailable Warning If the system turns off and the EVIC displays ACC UNAVAILABLE there may be a tempo rary malfunction that limits ACC functionality In this case ACC will be temporarily unavailable If this occurs try activating ACC again later following a key cycle If the problem persists see your authorized dealer ALC UNAVAILABLE O G n Service ACC Warning If the system turns off and the EVIC displays SERVICE ACC it indicates there is an internal system fault that requires service f
282. ntenance Service Schedule Schedule Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil Change the engine oil and engine oil J Change the engine oil and engine oil filter tt filter filter tt J Rotate tires Rotate tires J Rotate tires Inspect the CV joints 1 Replace the engine air cleaner filter J Inspect exhaust system 1 Replace the spark plugs 5 7L Engine Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends l Replace the air conditioning filter if and boot seals replace if necessary equipped 1 Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary 1 Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes 1 Inspect the rear axle fluid Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 257 45 000 Miles 72 000 km or 36 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J Rotate tires 1 If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Replace the air conditioning filter if equipped Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Change the rear axle fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following police taxi fl
283. ntinuation functionality available on the ve hicle can be any one of three types e After the ignition key is switched to OFF a call can continue on the uconnect phone either until the call ends or until a vehicle specific time expires or until the vehicle battery condition dictates cessation of the call on the uconnect phone and transfer of the call to the cellular phone e After the ignition key is switched to OFF a call can continue on the uconnect phone for a certain duration after which the call is auto matically transferred from the uconnect phone to the cellular phone e An active call is automatically transferred to the cellular phone after the ignition key is switched to OFF uconnect phone Features Language Selection To change the language that the uconnect phone is using e Press the to button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say the name of the language you wish to switch to English Dutch French German Italian or Spanish if so equipped e Continue to follow the system prompts to complete language selection After selecting one of the languages all prompts and voice commands will be in that language NOTE After every uconnect phone language change operation only the language specific 32 name phonebook is usable The paired phone name is not language specific and usable across all languages For command translations and alternate com man
284. nto the tire sidewall Refer to the Tires General Informa tion in this section for information on how to properly inflate the vehicle s tires The tire pres sure will also increase as the vehicle is driven this is normal and there should be no adjust ment for this increased pressure The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the tire pressure falls below the 186 low pressure warning limit for any reason in cluding low temperature effects and natural pressure loss through the tire The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire pressure as long as the condition exists and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended cold placard pres sure Once the low tire pressure warning Tire Pressure Monitoring TPM Telltale Light illumi nates you must increase the tire pressure to the recommended cold placard pressure in order for the TPM Telltale Light to turn off The system will automatically update and the TPM Telltale Light will turn off once the system receives the updated tire pressures The ve hicle may need to be driven for up to 20 min utes above 15 mph 25 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information For example your vehicle may have a recom mended cold parked for more than three hours placard pressure of 30 psi 207 kPa If the ambient temperature is 68 F 20 C and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi 186 kPa a temperature drop to 20
285. nts 191 Saver Mode 134 Specifications 250 Tank Capacity 249 FUGINDO uc dn sda SCR p x a 194 BUSES 2244 de pat bed P ee 241 Gas Cap Fuel Filler Cap 194 225 Gasoline Clean Air 193 Gasoline Fuel 191 CONSENVING cca gods dd us 134 Gauges Coolant Temperature 128 uL 129 Odometer 125 Speedometer 125 Tachometer 325 m beue 126 GearRanges 167 169 General Information 15 19 106 191 General Maintenance 225 Glass Cleaning 240 Gross Axle Weight Rating 196 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating 196 Hands Free Phone uconnect 59 Hazard Driving Through Flowing Rising or Shallow Standing Water 173 Hazard Warning Flasher 206 Head Restraints 81 Head Rosts sik ae ae ee A 81 Headlight Washers 92 231 Headlights ticas ebrei 246 Cleaning 240 High Beam x eux cens 89 High Beam Low Beam Select Switch 89 Lights On Reminder 88 On With Wipers 88 91 PASSING d REG a EU Ra 89 SWICK zu um psg uu Rae EGGS 87 Time Delay uy wem RES 88 WAaSlIeIS su den kaos eub epe ay a E 92 Heated Mirrors 59 Heated Seats 82 Heater Engine Block 164 High Beam Low Beam Select Dimm
286. o move toward the closed position NOTE Pinch protection is disabled while the switch is pressed Venting Sunroof Express Press and release the Vent button in the center of the switch and the sunroof will open to the vent position This is called Express Vent which operates regardless of sunroof position During Express Vent operation any movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof Sunshade Operation The sunshade can be opened manually How ever the sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens NOTE The sunshade cannot be closed if the sun roof is open Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the per ception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if equipped in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occurrence If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open then open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting If the buffet ing occurs with the sunroof open then adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window Sunroof Maintenance Use only a non abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the glass panel Ignition Off Operation For vehicles equipped with the EVIC the power sunroof switch will remain active for up to 60 minutes after the ignition switch is turned OFF Opening either front door
287. of this manual 36 WARNING e Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision The airbags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly In some collisions the air bags won t deploy at all Always wear your seat belts even though you have airbags e Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument panel during front airbag de ployment could cause serious injury in cluding death Airbags need room to inflate Sit back comfortably extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel e Side airbags also need room to inflate Do not lean against the door Sit upright in the center of the seat Airbag Deployment Sensors and Controls Occupant Restraint Controller ORC The ORC is part of a regulated safety system required for this vehicle The ORC determines if deployment of the front and or side airbags in a frontal or side collision is required Based on the impact sensors sig nals a central electronic ORC deploys the Ad vanced Front Airbags Supplemental Side Seat Airbags if equipped SABIC airbags if equipped and front seat belt pretensioners if equipped as required depending on severity and type of impact Advanced Front Airbags are designed to pro vide additional protection by supplementing the seat belts in certain frontal collisions de pending on the severity and type of collision Advanced Front Airbags are not expected to reduce th
288. of time This is due to the cold thick fluid in the steering system This noise should be considered normal and it does not in any way damage the steering system WARNING Continued operation with reduced power steering assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others Service should be ob tained as soon as possible CAUTION Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end of the steering wheel travel will in crease the steering fluid temperature and it should be avoided when possible Damage to the power steering pump may occur WARNING Fluid level should be checked on a level sur face and with the engine off to prevent injury from moving parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading Do not overfill Use only manu facturer s recommended power steering fluid Power Steering Fluid Check Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined service interval is not required The luid should only be checked if a leak is sus pected abnormal noises are apparent and or the system is not functioning as anticipated Coordinate inspection efforts through an autho rized dealer CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering system as the chemicals can dam age your power steering components Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty f necessary add fluid to restore to the proper indicated level With a clean cloth wipe any spilled fluid f
289. olvents such as benzene thin ner cleaners or anti static sprays 147 5 Store the disc in its case after playing 6 Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight 7 Do not store the disc where temperatures may become too high NOTE If you experience difficulty in playing a par ticular disc it may be damaged i e scratched reflective coating removed a hair moisture or dew on the disc oversized or have protection encoding Try a known good disc before considering disc player service RADIO OPERATION AND CELLULAR PHONES Under certain conditions the cellular phone being on in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your radio This condi tion may be lessened or eliminated by relocat ing the cellular phone antenna This condition is not harmful to the radio If your radio perfor mance does not satisfactorily clear by the repositioning of the antenna it is recom mended that the radio volume be turned down or off during cellular phone operation 148 CLIMATE CONTROLS The air conditioning and heating system is designed to make you comfortable in all types of weather Automatic Temperature Control 815b5818 Automatic Temperature Controls Automatic Operation The Dual Zone Climate Control System auto matically maintains the climate in the cabin of the vehicle at the comfort levels desired by the driver and passenger Operation of the system is quite simple Begin by turning the
290. on slippery surfaces is dangerous Unequal traction can cause sud den pulling of the rear wheels You could lose control of the vehicle and possibly have an accident Accelerate slowly and carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction ice snow wet mud loose sand etc Traction When driving on wet or slushy roads it is possible for a wedge of water to build up between the tire and road surface This is known as hydroplaning and may cause partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stop ping ability To reduce this possibility the fol lowing precautions should be observed 1 Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are slushy 2 Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles 3 Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become visible 4 Keep tires properly inflated 5 Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a sudden stop DRIVING THROUGH WATER Driving through water more than a few inches centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure safety and prevent damage to your vehicle Flowing Rising Water WARNING Do not drive on or across a road or path where water is flowing and or rising as in storm run off Flowing water can wear away the road or path s surface and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water Furthermore flow ing and or rising water can carry your vehicle away swiftly Fai
291. onebook Edit fea ture NOTE Editing phonebook entries is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion Delete uconnect Phonebook Entry e Press the te button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Delete e After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu you will then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish to delete You can either say the name of a phonebook entry that you wish to delete or you can say List Names to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook from which you choose To select one of the entries from the list press the ih button while the uconnect phone is playing the desired entry and say Delete e After you enter the name the uconnect phone will ask you which designation you wish to delete home work cellular pager or all Say the designation you wish to delete e Note that only the phonebook entry in the current language is deleted e Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be deleted or edited Delete Erase All uconnect Phonebook Entries e Press the te button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Erase All e The uconnect phone will ask you to verify that you wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook e After confirmation the phonebook entries will be deleted e Note that only the phonebook in the current language is deleted e Automatic downloaded p
292. oors will unlock when you grab hold of the front driver s door handle To select between Unlock Driver Door 1st Press and Unlock All Doors 1st Press refer to Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Sec tion 4 of this manual To Unlock From The Passenger Side With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft 1 5 m of the passenger side of the vehicle grab the front passenger door handle to unlock all four doors automatically NOTE All doors will unlock when the front passen ger door handle is grabbed regardless of the driver s door unlock preference setting Unlock Driver Door 1st Press or Unlock All Doors 1st Press Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry RKE Transmitter In Vehicle To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a Passive Entry RKE transmitter inside your vehicle the Passive Entry system is equipped with an automatic door unlock fea ture If one of the vehicle doors is open and the door panel switch is used to lock the vehicle once all open doors have been closed the vehicle checks the passenger compartment for any valid Passive Entry RKE transmitters If one of the vehicle s Passive Entry RKE transmitters is detected the Passive Entry System automati cally unlocks ALL vehicle doors and chirps the horn three times on the third attempt ALL doors will lock and the Passive Entry RKE transmitter can
293. ore than 50 mph 80 km h Temporary use spare tires have limited tread life When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the tempo rary use spare tire needs to be replaced Be sure to follow the warnings which apply to your spare Failure to do so could result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a conventional tire on the compact spare wheel since the wheel is designed specifically or the compact spare Do not install more than one compact spare tire wheel on the vehicle at any given time CAUTION Because of the reduced ground clearance do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with the compact spare installed Dam age to the vehicle may result Limited Use Spare If Equipped The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use on your vehicle This tire is identified by a limited use spare tire warning label located on the limited use spare tire and wheel assembly This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the front or rear axle o your vehicle but it is not Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling Since it is not the same tire replace or repair the original tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity WARNING The limited use spare tires are for emergency use only Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling With this t
294. ose in child restraints NOTE These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant The seat belt still must be worn snugly and positioned properly The pretensioners are triggered by the Occu pant Restraint Controller ORC Like the air bags the pretensioners are single use items After a collision deploys the airbags and or pretensioners a deployed airbag and or pre tensioner must be replaced immediately Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System BeltAlert If the driver s seat belt has not been buckled within 60 seconds of starting the vehicle and if the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h the BeltAlert will alert the driver to buckle the seat belt The driver should also instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat belts Once the warning is triggered BeltAlert will continue to chime and flash the Seat Belt Reminder Light for 96 seconds or until the driver s seat belt is buckled BeltAlert will be reactivated if the driver s seat belt is unbuckled for more than 10 seconds and the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h NOTE e BeltAlert can be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer e Chrysler Group LLC does not recommend deactivating BeltAlert If BeltAlert is deactivated the Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate while the driver seat belt remains unfas tened Seat Belts and Pregnant Women We recommend that pregnant wome
295. ould be taken in disposing of used engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle Used oil and oil filters indiscriminately discarded can present a problem to the environment Contact your authorized dealer service station or governmental agency for advice on how and where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area Engine Oil Filter The engine oil filter should be replaced at every engine oil change Engine Oil Filter Selection This manufacturers engines have a full flow type oil filter Use a filter of this type for replace ment The quality of replacement filters varies considerably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service MOPAR engine oil filters are a high quality oil filter and are recommended Engine Air Cleaner Filter Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Sec tion 8 for the proper maintenance intervals WARNING The air induction system air cleaner hoses etc can provide a measure of protection in the case of engine backfire Do not remove the air induction system air cleaner hoses etc unless such removal is necessary for repair or maintenance Make sure that no one is near the engine compartment before start ing the vehicle with the air induction system air cleaner hoses etc removed Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters v
296. oy BAe eee 208 Ife ob Tires ea 184 Pressure Monitor System TPMS 186 Radial RR 182 Replacement 184 ROTATION beta a t d 185 Safety i ues xe peg ER 181 Sel Sealing 185 Spare Tire 207 SPINNING gt da ia Bae 183 Tread Wear Indicators 184 86 Tongue Weight Trailer Weight 198 Torque Converter Clutch 168 Tow Hooks Emergency 215 216 TOWING 195 Behind a Motor Home 203 298 Disabled Vehicle 215 GUIDES ira don Beales a a 198 Recreational 203 Weight 2 o wee 198 Towing Eyes sess 215 Towing Vehicle Behind a Motor Home 203 Traction Control 178 Trailer Towing o 195 Cooling System Tips 202 MONES deer m dod a 203 inimum Requirements 198 Trailer and Tongue Weight 198 RE Raed Eu e 200 Trailer Towing Guide 198 Trailer Weight 198 Transfer Case edoh a eis 252 Transmission gt 237 Automatic 164 166 169 237 eee 252 Range Indicator 167 169 Shiftiig aee doo home 164 Transmitter Battery Service Remote Keyless Entry 19 Transmitter Programming Remote Keyless Entry 16 Transm
297. passenger front airbag An airbag deploy ment can cause severe injury or death to infants in that position Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat belt properly see Section on Child Restraints should be secured in the rear seat in child restraints or belt positioning booster seats Older children who do not use child restraints or belt positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled up in the rear 35 seat Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arm If a child from 1 to 12 years old not in a rear facing child seat must ride in the front passen ger seat move the seat as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint Refer to information on Child Restraints in this section You should read the instructions provided with your child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly All occupants should ALWAYS wear their lap and shoulder belts properly The driver and front passenger seats should be moved back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front Airbags room to inflate Do not lean against the door If your vehicle has side airbags and deployment occurs the side airbags will inflate forcefully into the space between you and the door If the airbag system in this vehicle needs to be modified to accommodate a disabled person contact the Customer Center Phone numbers are provided under If You Need Assistance in Section 9
298. periencing difficulty with the uconnect phone recognizing their voice com mands or numbers the uconnect phone Voice Training feature may be used To enter this training mode follow one of the two follow ing procedures From outside the uconnect phone mode e g from radio mode e Press and hold the iS button for five sec onds until the session begins or e Press the amp button and say the Setup Voice Training command Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by the uconnect phone For best results the Voice Training session should be completed when the vehicle is parked with the engine running all windows closed and the blower fan switched OFF This procedure may be repeated with a new user The system will adapt to the last trained voice only To restore the Voice Recognition system to factory default settings enter the Voice Training session via the above procedure and follow the prompts Voice Recognition VR e For best performance adjust the rearview mirror to provide at least in 1 cm gap between the overhead console if equipped and the mirror e Always wait for the beep before speaking e Speak normally without pausing just as you would speak to a person sitting a few feet meters away from you e Make sure that no one other than you is speaking during a voice recognition period Performance is maximized under e low to medium blower setting e low to medium vehicl
299. personnel special tools and equip ment to perform all service The manufacturer and its distributors are vitally interested in your complete satisfaction with this vehicle If you encounter a service or warranty problem which is not resolved to your satisfaction discuss the matter with your autho rized dealer s management Your authorized dealer will be happy to assist you with any questions about your vehicle IMPORTANT NOTICE ALL MATERIAL CONTAINED IN THIS PUBLI CATION IS BASED ON THE LATEST INFORMA TION AVAILABLE AT TIME OF PUBLICATION APPROVAL THE RIGHT IS RESERVED TO PUBLISH REVISIONS AT ANY TIME This Owner s Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering spe cialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your new vehicle It is supple mented by a Warranty Information Booklet and various customer oriented documents You are urged to read these publications carefully Fol lowing the instructions and recommendations in this Owner s Manual will help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle After you have read the Owner s Manual it should be stored in the vehicle for convenient reference and remain with the vehicle when sold The manufacturer reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications and or to make additions to or improvements in its products without imposing any obligations upon itself to install them on products previ ously manufac
300. place if necessary Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Change the rear axle fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals replace if necessary OCOC O C O Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 97 500 Miles 156 000 km or 78 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter t Rotate tires Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 261 105 000 Miles 168 000 km or 84 Months Maintenance Service Schedule J Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J Rotate tires 1 If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Replace the spark plugs 2 7L and 3 5L Engines Replace the timing belt 3 5L Engine Replace the air conditioning filter if equipped Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the rear axle fluid Flush and replace the engine coolant OOC Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 112 500 Miles 180 00
301. placed in the RUN position the transmission shift lever is in the NEUTRAL position and the vehicle speed is less than 5 mph 8 km h unless the wiper control on the multifunction lever is moved or the shift lever is moved out of the NEUTRAL position HEADLIGHT WASHERS IF EQUIPPED The multifunction lever operates the headlight washers when the ignition switch is in the ON position and the headlights are turned on The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the steering column To use the headlight washers push the multi function lever inward toward the steering col umn to the second detent and release it The headlight washers will spray a timed high pressure spray of washer fluid onto each head light lens In addition the windshield washers will spray the windshield and the windshield wipers will cycle NOTE The headlight washers will operate on the first spray of the windshield washer and then every tenth spray after that 818c9c1b Headlight Washer POWER TILT TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN IF EQUIPPED This feature allows you to tilt the steering col umn upward or downward lt also allows you to lengthen or shorten the steering column The power tilt telescoping steering column lever is located below the multifunction lever on the steering column Power Tilt Telescoping Steering To tilt the steering column move the lever up or down as desired To lengthen or shorten the steering
302. pt or soft until after the break in pe riod This is a normal condition and pre cision shifts will develop within a few shift cycles The shift lever is automatically locked while in the PARK position To move the shift lever out of the PARK position the brake pedal must be firmly pressed before the shift lock will release Move the shift lever to the desired position only when the engine is idling normally and the brake pedal is applied Do not release the brake pedal until ready to drive The vehicle may otherwise accelerate quickly when the shift lever is in the DRIVE or REVERSE position WARNING Unintended movement of a vehicle could in jure those in and near the vehicle As with all vehicles you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running Before exiting a vehicle you should always shift the transmission into PARK remove the key fob from the ignition and apply the parking brake Once the key fob is removed from the ignition the transmission shift lever is locked in the PARK position securing the vehicle against unwanted move ment Furthermore you should never leave unattended children inside a vehicle Over Temperature Mode The transmission electronics constantly monitor the transmission oil temperature If the trans mission exceeds normal operating tempera ture the transmission will change the way it shifts to help control the condition This may result in a slightly different feeling or
303. ptions NOTE At any time you can say the words Can cel Help or Main Menu These commands are universal and can be used from any menu All other commands can be used depending upon the active applica tion For example if you are in the disc menu and you are listening to FM radio you can speak commands from the disc menu or from the FM radio menu When using this system you should speak clearly and at a normal speaking volume The system will best recognize your speech if the windows are closed and the heater air conditioning fan is set to low At any point if the system does not recognize one of your commands you will be prompted to repeat it To hear the first available Menu press the e button and say Help or Main Menu 77 Commands The Voice Recognition VR system under stands two types of commands Universal com mands are available at all times Local com mands are available if the supported radio mode is active Changing the Volume 1 Start a dialogue by pressing the 6 button 2 Say a command e g Help 3 Use the ON OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Recognition VR system is speaking Please note the volume setting for VR is differ ent than the audio system Main Menu Start a dialogue by pressing the iS button You may say Main Menu to switch to the main menu In this mode you can say the following com ma
304. r grilles e Floor e Air flows through the floor outlets lo e cated under the instrument panel and into the rear seating area through vents under the front seats e Bi Level Air flows through the outlets located in E the instrument panel and through the outlets located on the floor Air flows through the registers in the back of the center console to the rear seat passengers These registers can be closed to block airflow e Panel 7 Air flows through the outlets located in the instrument panel Air flows through the registers in the back of the center console to the rear seat passengers These registers can be closed to block airflow e Air Conditioning Control Press this button to turn on the air X conditioning during manual operation only When the air conditioning is turned on cool dehumidified air will flow through the outlets selected with the mode control dial Press this button a second time to turn off the air conditioning An indicator in the button illuminates when manual compressor operation is selected NOTE To control the air conditioning manually the mode selector must be moved out of the AUTO position e Recirculation Control This button can be used to block out smoke odors dust high hu lt midity or if rapid cooling is de sired The Recirculation mode should only be used temporarily An indicator in the button illumi nates when the Recirculation mode is active You may u
305. r more information refer to Key less Go If Equipped under Starting Proce dure in Section 5 of this manual Wireless Ignition Node WIN The Wireless Ignition Node WIN operates similar to an ignition switch It has four operat ing positions three with detents and one that is spring loaded The detent positions are OFF ACC and RUN The START position is a spring loaded momentary contact position When re leased from the START position the switch automatically returns to the RUN position NOTE If your vehicle is equipped with Keyless Go the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC will display the ignition switch posi tion OFF ACC RUN Refer to Electronic Ve hicle Information Center EVIC If Equipped in Section 4 for more information E Wireless Ignition Node WIN 1 OFF 2 ACC ACCESSORY 3 RUN 4 START Key Fob The Key Fob operates the ignition switch It also contains the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter and an emergency key which stores in the rear of the Key Fob NOTE If your vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry Keyless Go PEKG the Key Fob will also contain a special receiver that commu nicates with the vehicle Passive Entry Keyless Go Key Fobs can only be used with Passive Entry Keyless Go equipped ve hicles Non Passive Entry Keyless Go Key Fobs can only be used with Non Passive Entry Keyless Go vehicles The emergen
306. r position registration plate illumina tion device shall be connected such that no light of the device has a common connection with both pins 5 and 7 Towing Tips Before setting out on a trip practice turning stopping and backing up the trailer in an area ocated away from heavy traffic Automatic Transmission The DRIVE range can be selected when tow ing However if frequent shifting occurs while in this range select a lower gear range using the 3 position if equipped or the AutoStick ERS feature if equipped 202 NOTE Selecting a lower gear range while operating the vehicle under heavy operating condi tions will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat build up This action will also provide better engine braking If you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than 45 minutes of continuous operation then change the automatic transmission fluid and filter according to the interval specified in the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 of this manual Electronic Speed Control If Equipped Do not use hilly terrain or with heavy loads When using the speed control if you expe rience speed drops greater than 10 mph 16 km h disengage until you can get back to cruising speed Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to maximize fuel efficiency AutoStick Electronic Range Select ERS If Equipped By usin
307. rage Alternate lug nuts until each nut has been tightened twice The correct tightness of each lug nut is 100 ft lb 135 Nm If in doubt about the correct tightness have them checked with a torque wrench by your autho rized dealer or at a service station 12 Stow the jack tools and flat tire Make sure the base of the jack faces the rear of the vehicle before tightening down the fastener WARNING A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a colli sion or hard stop could endanger the occu pants of the vehicle Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places provided Wheel Cover or Center Cap Installation If Equipped NOTE Do not attempt to install a center cap or wheel cover on the compact spare 1 Mount the road tire on the axle For vehicles equipped with wheel covers perform Steps 2 and 3 For vehicles equipped with center caps proceed to Step 4 211 2 Install two lug nuts on the mounting studs which are on each side of the stud that is in alignment with the valve stem Install the lug nuts with the cone shaped end of the nut toward the wheel Lightly tighten the lug nuts To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle is lowered to the ground e Tire and Wheel Cover Or Center Cap 4 Wheel Cover 5 Mounting Stud 060503827 1 Valve Stem 2 Valve Notch 3 Wheel Lug Nut 3 Align the valve notch in
308. rate hills is normal The automatic transmission will downshift while climbing uphill or descending downhill This downshift is necessary to maintain vehicle set speed On steep hills a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed Control WARNING Electronic Speed control can be dangerous where the system cannot maintain a constant speed Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions and you could lose control An accident could be the result Do not use speed control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding icy snow covered or slippery ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL ACC IF EQUIPPED Adaptive Cruise Control ACC increases the driving convenience provided by cruise control while traveling on highways and major road ways However it is not a safety system and not designed to prevent collisions ACC will allow you to keep cruise control en gaged in light to moderate traffic conditions without the constant need to reset your cruise control ACC utilizes an infrared sensor de signed to detect a vehicle directly ahead of you NOTE e If the sensor does not detect a vehicle directly ahead of you ACC will maintain a fixed speed e Ifthe ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead ACC will apply limited braking or accel eration automatically to maintain a preset following distance while matching the speed of the vehicle ahead WARNING e Adaptive
309. rd Trailer and Tongue Weight Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side which will cause loss of control of the vehicle and trailer Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of many trailer accidents Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on your trailer hitch Consider the following items when computing the weight on the rear axle of the vehicle e The tongue weight of the trailer e The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put in or on your vehicle 198 e The weight of the driver and all passengers NOTE Remember that everything put into or on the trailer adds to the load on your vehicle Also additional factory installed options dealer installed options must be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard located on the face of the driver s door or on the driver s side pillar for the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo for your vehicle Towing Requirements To promote proper break in of your new vehicle drivetrain components the following guidelines are recommended CAUTION e Avoid towing a trailer for the first 500 miles 805 km of vehicle operation Doing so may damage your vehicle e During the first 500 miles 805 km of trailer towing limit your speed to 50 mph 80 km h WARNING Improper to
310. recommended fluid No 238 chemical flushes should be used in any trans mission only the approved lubricant may be used Special Additives Automatic Transmission Fluid ATF is an engi neered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives Therefore do not add any fluid additives to the transmis sion The only exception to this policy is the use of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid leaks In addition avoid using transmission sealers as they may adversely affect seals CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your transmis sion as the chemicals can damage your trans mission components Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Appearance Care and Protection from Corrosion Protection of Body and Paint from Corrosion Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geographic locations and usage Chemicals that make roads passable in snow and ice and chemicals that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly cor rosive to the metal in your vehicle Outside parking which exposes your vehicle to air borne contaminants road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an adverse effect on paint metal trim and underbody protection The following maintenance recommendations will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resistance built into your veh
311. rect level Check the oil level at regular intervals such as every fuel stop The best time to check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off Checking the oil while the vehicle is on leve ground will improve the accuracy of the oil leve readings Maintain the oil level in the SAFE range Adding 1 0 at 1 0 1 of oil when the reading is at the bottom of the SAFE range wil result in an oil level at the top of the SAFE range on these engines CAUTION Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aera tion or loss of oil pressure This could damage your engine Change Engine Oil Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Sec tion 8 for the proper maintenance intervals Engine Oil Selection Gasoline Engines Non ACEA Categories For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating conditions the manufacturer only recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet the require ments of Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 American Petroleum Institute API Engine Oil Identification Symbol This symbol means that the oil has been certified by the American Pe troleum Institute API The manu facturer only rec ommends API Cer tified engine oils CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the chemicals can damage your engine Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Engine Oil Selection
312. reeze is a regulated substance requiring proper disposal Check with your local authori ties to determine the disposal rules for your community To prevent ingestion by animals or children do not store ethylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze in open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground If ingested by a child or pet seek emergency assistance immediately Clean up any ground spills immediately Coolant Level The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for determining that the coolant level is adequate With the engine OFF and cold the level of the coolant in the bottle should be between the ranges indicated on the bottle The radiator normally remains completely full so there is no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for engine coolant antifreeze freeze point or replacing engine coolant anti freeze Advise your service attendant of this As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month When additional engine coolant antifreeze is needed to maintain the proper level it should be added to the coolant bottle Do not overfill 235 Points to Remember NOTE When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles kilometers of operation you may observe vapor coming from the front of the engine compartment This is normally a re sult of moisture from rain snow or high humidity accumulating on the radiator an
313. revent possible catalyst damage CAUTION Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition In the event of engine malfunction particularly involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of performance have your ve hicle serviced promptly Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe malfunction could cause the converter to overheat result ing in possible damage to the converter and the vehicle NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions con trol systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you WARNING A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over materials that can burn Such ma terials might be grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust system Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn n unusual situations involving grossly malfunc tioning engine operation a scorching odor may indicate severe and abnormal catalyst over heating If this should occur safely bring the vehicle to a complete stop shut the engine OFF and allow the vehicle to cool Thereafter obtain service including a tune up to manufac turer s specifications immediately To minimize the possibility of catalyst damage e Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in motion e Do not try to start the
314. riParkSense9 2 in rere ue ET ETE ENTE 108 e Rear ParkSense Sensors 108 e Rear ParkSense Warning Display 108 Front ParkSense 109 e Front ParkSense Sensors 109 e Front ParkSense Warning Display 110 e Enable Disable Front Rear ParkSense 111 eServiceParkSensel curo as oe aia 111 e Cleaning the ParkSense 111 e ParkSense System Usage Precautions 112 OVERHEAD CONSOLE lt sor sore ee se E 113 Courtesy Reading Lights 113 Sunglasses Storage lt o n oea ET TTE E 114 e POWER SUNROOF IF EQUIPPED 114 e Opening Sunroof Express 114 e Closing Sunroof Express 114 6 Pinch Protect Feature 114 e Pinch Protect Override 114 Venting Sunroof Express 115 e Sunshade Operation 115 56 MIRRORS Inside Day Night Mirror A two point pivot system allows for horizontal and vertical mirror adjustment Adjust the mirror to center on the view through the rear window Headlight glare can be reduced by moving the small control under the mirror to the night position toward the rear of the vehicle The mirror should be adjusted while set in the day position toward the windshield A Adjusting Rearview Mirror 030407085 Automatic Dimming M
315. rking brake 166 3 Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal 4 Using the screwdriver press and hold the override tab through the access port on the center console A Interlock Manual Override 5 Move the shift lever into the NEUTRAL posi tion 6 The vehicle may then be started in NEU TRAL 7 Reinstall the override cover With Keyless Go If Equipped If the engine is running press the START STOP button to turn it off Release the brake pedal and press the START STOP button once or twice to go to the ACC or RUN position Do not start the engine Then follow the instructions shown above to activate the override Four Speed Automatic Transmission If Equipped NOTE Under extreme cold temperatures 6 F 21 C and when in DRIVE transmission operation may be briefly limited to only second gear operation Normal operation will resume once the transmission tempera ture has risen to a suitable level Shifting from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE should be done only after the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when moving the shift lever between these gears Shift Lever Gear Ranges PARK This range supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission The engine can be started in this range Never use PARK while the vehicle is in motion Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range When p
316. rn ParkSense off the instru ment cluster will display PARK ASSIST DEACTIVATED Furthermore once you turn ParkSense off it remains off until you turn it on again even if you cycle the ignition key When you move the shift lever to the REVERSE position and ParkSense is turned off a single chime will sound once per ignition cycle and the instrument cluster will display PARK ASSIST DEAC TIVATED ParkSense when on will MUTE the radio when it is sounding a tone if equipped 112 e If a ParkSense system malfunction oc curs a single chime will sound once per ignition cycle In addition the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC will dis play SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM and the LED in the ParkSense switch will illuminate If this occurs see your autho rized dealer for service Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly taking care not to scratch or damage them The sensors must not be covered with ice snow slush mud dirt or debris Failure to do so can result in the system not working properly The system might not detect an obstacle near the fascia bumper or it could provide a false indica tion that an obstacle is present Objects must not be within 12 in 30 cm from the rear fascia bumper while driving the vehicle Failure to do so can result in the system misinterpreting a close object as a sensor problem causing the SER VICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM message to be displayed i
317. rom all surfaces Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Section 7 for the correct fluid type MULTI DISPLACEMENT SYSTEM MDS IF EQUIPPED 5 7L ENGINE ONLY This feature offers improved fuel economy by shutting off four of the engine s eight cylinders during light load and cruise conditions The system is automatic with no driver inputs or additional driving skills required NOTE The MDS system may take some time to return to full functionality after a battery disconnect PARKING BRAKE Before leaving the vehicle make sure that the parking brake is fully applied and place the shift lever in the PARK position The foot operated parking brake is located below the lower left corner of the instrument panel To apply the park brake firmly push the park brake pedal fully To release the parking brake press the park brake pedal a second time and let your foot up as you feel the brake disengage um rr Parking Brake 175 When the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON position the Brake Warning Light in the instrument cluster will illuminate NOTE e When the parking brake is applied and the transmission is placed in gear the Brake Warning Light will flash If vehicle speed is detected a chime will sound to alert the driver Fully release the parking brake before attempting to move the vehicle e This light only shows that the parking brake is
318. rom an au thorized dealer Precautions While Driving with ACC In certain driving situations ACC may have detection issues In these cases ACC may brake late or unexpectedly The driver needs to stay alert and may need to intervene Adding a Trailer Hitch The weight of a trailer hitch may affect the performance of ACC If there is a noticeable change in performance following the installa tion of a hitch such as reduced detection range please see your authorized dealer for service Offset Driving ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that is offset from your direct line of travel There will not be sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead The offset vehicle may move in and out of the line of travel which can cause your vehicle to brake or accelerate unexpectedly 818e9557 Turns and Bends In turns or bends ACC may detect a vehicle ahead too late or too early This may cause your vehicle to brake late or unexpectedly Give extra attention in curves and be ready to apply the brakes if necessary Be sure to select an appropriate speed while driving in curves 818e955e ACC may occasionally provide braking and or a driver alert that you consider unnecessary This may be the system s response to signs guardrails and other stationary objects in a curve This may also occur at the base of dramatic hills This is normal operation and your vehicle does not require service Using ACC on Hills When driving on
319. ry 1 2 Profile Set e Memory 1 2 Profile Recall e Memory System Disabled Vehicle Not In Park with a single chime emory System Disabled Seat Belt Buck ed with a single chime Personal Settings Not Available Vehicle Not n Park Left Right Front Door Ajar one or more with a single chime if speed is above 1 mph 1 km h Left Right Rear Door Ajar one or more with a single chime if speed is above 1 mph 1 km h Door s Ajar with a single chime if vehicle is in motion Trunk Ajar with a single chime Low Washer Fluid with a single chime ECO Fuel Saver Indicator If Equipped SERVICE AWD SYSTEM All Wheel Drive AWD system is not functioning properly and service is required Normal Cruise Ready When Adaptive Cruise Control ACC system is turned off and Normal Fixed Speed Cruise Control mode is available Refer to Adaptive Cruise Control ACC in Section 3 if equipped e Cruise Off When the Adaptive Cruise Control ACC system is turned off Refer to Adaptive Cruise Control ACC in Section 3 if equipped ACC Ready When the ACC system is activated Refer to Adaptive Cruise Control ACC in Section if equipped e ACC Set After setting the desired speed inthe ACC system Refer to Adaptive Cruise Control ACC in Section 3 if equipped e ACC Cancelled To disable the ACC sys tem Refer to Adaptive Cruise Control ACC in Sec
320. s Rear Seat Cupholders The rear seat cupholders are located in the center armrest between the rear seats The cupholders are positioned forward in the arm rest and side by side to provide convenient access to beverage cans or bottles while main taining a resting place for the rear occupants elbows Rear Seat Cupholders STORAGE Console Features The center console contains two shift bezel cubby bins with rubber mats for holding small items For vehicles not equipped with naviga tion radio the console also contains an extra storage bin located below the climate control which holds up to four CD jewel cases 117 Two separate storage compartments are also located underneath the armrest 1 Release button for bottom compartment 2 Release button for top compartment 3 Top Compartment 4 Bottom Compartment You can access this compartment directly without first exposing the upper compartment by operating the Release Button for the bottom compartment with the arm rest down The top compartment holds small items such as a pen and note pad while the larger bottom compartment will hold CDs and alike The bottom compartment also contains a 12 Volt power outlet and a molded in coin holder de signed to hold various size coins A slot in the 118 left and right side of the top compartment provides clearance for power cords to pass conveniently out of the bin with the lid closed This feature i
321. s tance the Hazard Warning flasher will continue to operate even though the ignition is placed in the OFF position NOTE With extended use the Hazard Warning flasher may wear down your battery 206 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS In any of the following situations you can reduce the potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action e On the highways slow down e In city traffic while stopped place the transmission in NEUTRAL but do not in crease the engine idle speed NOTE There are steps that you can take to slow down an impending overheat condition e If your air conditioner A C is on turn it off The A C system adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning the A C off can help remove this heat e You can also turn the temperature control to maximum heat the mode control to floor and the blower control to high This allows the heater core to act as a supple ment to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the engine cooling system CAUTION Driving with a hot cooling system could dam age your vehicle If the temperature gauge reads H pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range If the pointer remains on the H turn the engine off immediately and call for service WARNING You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant antifreeze or steam from your radia
322. s 1 6 4 8 km of driving Be cause engine speed is higher when the torque converter clutch is not engaged it may seem as if the transmission is not shifting into Overdrive when cold This is considered a normal condition Pulling the shift lever into the 3 position will show that the transmission is able to shift into and out of Overdrive e If the vehicle has not been driven for several days the first few seconds of operation after shifting the transmission into gear may seem sluggish This is due to the transmission fluid partially draining from the torque converter into the trans mission This is considered a normal con dition and it will not cause damage to the transmission The torque converter will refill within five seconds of shifting from PARK into any other gear position Transmission Limp Home Mode The transmission is monitored for abnormal conditions If a condition is detected that could cause damage the transmission automatically shifts into second gear The transmission re mains in second gear despite the forward gear selected PARK REVERSE and NEUTRAL will continue to operate This reset feature allows the vehicle to be driven to an authorized dealer for service without damaging the transmission If the problem has been momentary the trans mission can be reset to regain all forward gears e Stop the vehicle and shift into PARK e Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position OFF position
323. s The Video Surround Mode will only be available for video media sources DVDs Video CDs or other video media supported by the radio Compass Display HOME Button The compass readings indicate the direction the vehicle is facing Press and release the HOME but ton to display one of eight com pass readings and the outside temperature 137 Automatic Compass Calibration This compass is self calibrating which elimi nates the need to set the compass manually When the vehicle is new the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will display CAL until the compass is calibrated You may also calibrate the compass by completing one or more 360 degree turns in an area free from large metal or metallic objects until the CAL message displayed in the EVIC turns off The compass will now function normally 138 Manual Compass Calibration If the compass appears erratic and the CAL message does not appear in the EVIC display you must put the compass into the Calibration Mode manually as follows 1 Turn the ignition switch ON 2 Press and hold the HOME button for ap proximately two seconds 3 Press the SCROLL button until Calibrate Compass displays in the EVIC 4 Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button to start the calibration The message CAL will display in the EVIC 5 Complete one or more 360 degree turns in an area free from large metal or metallic ob jects until the CA
324. s and they should be of adequate ca pacity Failure to do this could lead to accel erated brake lining wear higher brake pedal effort and longer stopping distances 200 Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehi cle s hydraulic brake lines It can overload your brake system and cause it to fail You might not have brakes when you need them and could have an accident e Towing any trailer will increase your stop ping distance When towing you should allow for additional space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you Failure to do so could result in an accident WARNING Towing Requirements Trailer Lights and Wiring Whenever you pull a trailer regardless of the trailer size stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for motoring safety The Trailer Tow Package may include a 7 pin or a 18 pin wiring harness Use a factory ap proved trailer harness and connector NOTE Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles wiring harness The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector 81789d4e 7 Pin Connector Pin Function Wire Color Number 1 Left Turn Signal Yellow 2 Rear Fog Light Blue 3 Ground Common White Return 4 Right Turn Signal Green Pin Number Function Wire Color 5 Right Rear Position Side Marker Lights and Rear Registration Plate Il
325. s are not working the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC may also be disabled The airbags may not be ready to inflate for your protection Promptly check the fuse block for blown fuses Refer to the label located on the inside of the fuse block cover for the proper airbag fuses See your authorized dealer if the fuse is good Event Data Recorder EDR In the event of an accident your vehicle is designed to record up to five seconds of spe cific vehicle data parameters see list below in an event data recorder prior to the moment of airbag deployment or near deployment if ap plicable and up to a quarter second of either high speed deceleration data or change in velocity during and or after airbag deployment or near deployment EDR data is ONLY re corded if an airbag deploys or nearly deploys and is otherwise unavailable NOTE 1 A near deployment event occurs when the airbag sensor detects severe vehicle deceleration usually indicative of a crash but not severe enough to warrant airbag deployment 2 Under certain circumstances EDR data may not be recorded e g loss of battery power In conjunction with other data gathered during a complete accident investigation the elec tronic data may be used by Chrysler Group LLC and others to learn more about the pos sible causes of crashes and associated injuries in order to assess and improve vehicle perfor mance In addition to crash investigations initi ated by C
326. s ideal for games laptop s cellular phones or other electrical equipment The con sole s front opening lid allows for easy access to these compartments Cargo Area The 60 40 split folding rear seat provides cargo carrying versatility The seatbacks fold down easily by pulling nylon tabs between the seatbacks and the bolsters When the seats are folded down they provide a continuous nearly lat extension of the load floor WARNING The weight and position of cargo and passen gers can change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle handling To avoid loss of control resulting in personal injury follow these guide lines for loading your vehicle e Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor Put heavier objects as low and as far forward as possible Continued WARNING Continued e Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear axle Too much weight or improp erly placed weight over or behind the rear axle can cause the rear of the vehicle to sway e Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of the seatback This could impair visibility or become a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or collision When the seatback is folded to the upright position make sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the seatback above the seat strap WARNING e Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into position If the seatback in not securely locked into position
327. se surround sound for any audio source Audio Surround is optimized for front seat passengers for any audio source This sur round effect is available for audio from any source AM FM CD Satellite Radio or AUX and is activated through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Driver Selectable Surround Sound DSS under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 DSS modes for audio sources are Stereo and Audio Surround which is surround sound equalized for the front seat occupants Please note that DSS effects are dependent on the mix of the original recording Some audio will sound better in DSS modes others in Stereo mode NOTE Dependent on the audio source the output may sound better in stereo or DDS surround mode When in Audio Surround mode balance is set automatically Fader control is available to add more surround audio if desired REMOTE SOUND SYSTEM CONTROLS IF EQUIPPED The remote sound system controls are located on the surface of the steering wheel at the three and nine o clock positions A 3 045105297 Remote Sound System Controls Vehicles equipped with steering wheel mounted buttons are also equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC The EVIC features a driver interactive display which is located in the instrument cluster VOLUME Button The VOLUME button controls the sound level of the sound
328. se this feature separately NOTE Extended use of recirculation may cause the windows to fog If the interior of the win dows begins to fog press the recirculation button to return to outside air Some temp humidity conditions will cause captured in terior air to condense on windows and ham per visibility For this reason the system will not allow recirculation to be selected while in Defrost or Defrost Floor mode Attempt ing to use the recirculation while in these modes will cause the indicator in the control button to blink and then turn off 151 Operating Tips NOTE Refer to the chart at the end of this section for suggested control settings for various weather conditions Summer Operation The engine cooling system in air conditioned vehicles must be protected with a high quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect against engine over heating A solution of 50 ethylene glycol antifreeze coolant and 50 water is recom mended Refer to Maintenance Procedures in Section 7 for proper coolant selection Winter Operation Use of the air Recirculation mode during Winter months is not recommended because it may cause window fogging 152 Vacation Storage Anytime you store your vehicle or keep it out of service i e vacation for two weeks or more run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting This will ensure a
329. security alarm Turn Headlights On with Remote Key Unlock This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter When this feature is turned on and the vehicle is equipped with the Passive Entry system using the Passive Entry system to UNLOCK the vehicle will cause the parking lights to flash The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles equipped with the EVIC Refer to Turn Headlights On with Remote Key Unlock under Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features under Electronic Vehicle Informa tion Center EVIC If Equipped in Section 4 To Lock the Doors Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter to lock all doors The turn signal lights will flash and the horn will chirp to ac knowledge the signal If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry refer to Passive Entry System If Equipped under Door Locks in this section for more information To Unlatch the Trunk Press the TRUNK button on the RKE transmitter two times within five seconds to unlatch the trunk If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry refer to Passive Entry System If Equipped under Door Locks in this section for more information Using the Panic Alarm To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off press and hold the PANIC button on the RKE trans mitter for at least one second and release When the Panic Alarm is on the hea
330. see a message on the phone display that the Bluetooth link is busy In this case the user must first disconnect or drop the Bluetooth connection to the uconnect phone and then send the address book entry via Bluetooth Please see your phone Owners Manual for specific in structions on how to drop the Bluetooth connection e If the phonebook entry is longer than 24 characters it will only use the first 24 characters Edit uconnect Phonebook Entries Editing names in the phonebook is recom mended when the vehicle is not in motion Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be deleted or edited e Press the 2 button to begin 64 e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Edit You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook entry that you wish to edit e Next choose the number designation home work cellular or pager that you wish to edit e When prompted recite the new phone num ber for the phonebook entry that you are editing After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook you will be given the opportunity to edit another entry in the phonebook call the number you just edited or return to the main menu Phonebook Edit can be used to add another phone number to a name entry that already exists in the phonebook For example the entry John Doe may have a cellular and a home number but you can add John Doe s work number later using the Ph
331. sel Tel 0800 94634 free phone number Fax 32 0 2 717 3301 BOLIVIA Ovando amp Cia S A Av Cristobal de Mendoza 2do Anillo y Canal Isuto Santa Cruz Bolivia Tel 591 3 336 3100 Fax 591 3 334 0229 BRAZIL Chrysler do Brasil Av Alfred Jurzykowski 562 09680 900 S o Bernardo do Campo S P Tel 55 11 4173 6611 Fax 55 11 4173 9200 BULGARIA BALKAN STAR Resbarska Str 5 1510 Sofia Tel 359 2 91988 Fax 359 2 945 40 14 CHILE Comercial Chrysler S A Av Americo Vespucio 1601 Quilicura Santiago Chile Tel 56 2 620 7600 Fax 56 2 730 6201 CHINA Chrysler Group China Sales Limited 16F Gemdale Plaza Tower A No 91 Jian Guo Road Chaoyang District Beijing 100022 P R China Chrysler Brand Tel 400 650 1195 Dodge Brand Tel 400 650 0118 COLOMBIA Chrysler Colombia S A Avenida Calle 26 70A 25 Bogot Colombia Tel 57 1 4236700 Fax 57 1 410 5667 COSTA RICA AutoStar La Uruca frente al Banco Nacional San Jos Costa Rica Tel 506 295 0000 Fax 506 295 0052 CROATIA EUROLINE d o o Kovinska 5 10 000 Zagreb Tel 385 1 3441 111 Fax 385 1 3441 113 CZECH REPUBLIC Chrysler Czech Republic s r o Daimlerova 2296 2 149 45 Praha 4 Chodov Czech Republic Tel 420 0 2 71077 111 Tel 420 0 2 25101 111 Fax 420 0 2 71077 507 DENMARK Chrysler Danmark ApS Frederikskaj 4 DK 1790 K benhavn V Tel 45 0 35 256 830 Fax 45 0 35 256 832 DOMI
332. sing this button toggles be tween Shuffle ON and Shuffle OFF modes for the iPod If the RND icon is showing on the radio display then the shuffle mode is ON List Or Browse Mode During Play mode pressing any of the buttons described below takes you to List mode List mode enables you to scroll through the list of menus and tracks on the iPod e TUNE control knob The TUNE control knob functions in a similar manner as the scroll wheel on the iPod e Turning it clockwise forward and coun terclockwise backward scrolls through the lists displaying the track detail on the radio display Once you have the track to be played highlighted on the radio dis play press the TUNE control knob to select and start playing the track Turning he TUNE control knob fast will scroll hrough the list faster During fast scroll you may notice a slight delay in updating he information on the radio display e During all List modes the iPod displays all lists in wrap around mode So if the rack is at the bottom of the list just turn he wheel backwards counter clockwise o get to the track faster e n List mode the radio PRESET Buttons are used as shortcuts to the following lists on the iPod e Preset 1 Playlists e Preset 2 Artists e Preset 3 Albums e Preset 4 Genres e Preset 5 Audiobooks e Preset 6 Podcasts e Pressing a PRESET button will display the current list on the top line and the
333. sist Tap the lever up or down once without moving beyond the detent and the turn signal right or left will flash three times then automatically turn off High Low Beam Switch Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch the headlights to high beam Pull the lever toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam Flash to Pass You can signal another vehicle with your head lights by lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you This will turn on the high beam headlights until the lever is released Overhead Console Map Reading Lights These lights are mounted between the sun visors on the overhead console Each light is turned on by pressing the lens Press the lens a second time to turn off the light These lights also turn on when a door is opened or when 89 the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter is pressed or when the dimmer control is turned fully upward past the second detent 81941159 Overhead Console Interior Lights The interior lights come on when a door is opened To protect the battery the interior lights will turn off automatically 10 minutes after the ignition is placed in the OFF position This will occur if the interior lights were switched on manually or are on because a door is open This includes the glove box light but not the trunk light To 90 restore interior light operation either turn the ignition switch ON or cycle the light switch
334. sophisticated electronic equipment that may be susceptible to inter ference caused by improperly installed or high output radio transmitting equipment This interference can cause possible loss of anti lock braking capability Installation of such equipment should be performed by qualified professionals e Pumping of the Anti Lock Brakes will dimin ish their effectiveness and may lead to an accident Pumping makes the stopping dis tance longer Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or stop The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded Continued WARNING Continued e The ABS cannot prevent accidents includ ing those resulting from excessive speed in turns following another vehicle too closely or hydroplaning Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents e The capabilities of an ABS equipped ve hicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner that could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and type and tires must be properly in flated to produce accurate signals for the com puter ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic brake control system th
335. ssure limit will not cause the TPM Telltale Light to illuminate or the chime to sound Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings The TPM Telltale Light will illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the four active road tires Should this occur you should stop as soon as possible check the inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle and inflate each tire to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pressure value Once the system receives the updated tire pressures the system will automatically update and the TPM Telltale Light will turn off The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information 187 Check TPMS Warning If a system fault is detected the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid The system fault will also sound chime If the ignition switch is cycled this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists The TPM Telltale Light will turn off when the fault condition no longer exists A system fault can occur due to any of the following 1 Signal interference due to electronic de vices or driving next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPM sensors 2 Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains materials that may block radio wave signals 3 Accumulation of snow or ice arou
336. stem will not allow recirculation to be selected while in De frost or Defrost Floor mode Attempting to use the recirculation while in these modes will cause the indicator in the control button to blink and then turn off Manual Operation This system offers a full complement of manual override features which consist of blower pre ferred automatic mode preferred automatic or blower and mode preferred automatic This means the operator can override the blower the mode or both There is a manual blower range for times when the AUTO setting is not desired The blower can be set to any fixed blower speed by rotating the blower control knob on the left NOTE For vehicles equipped with Remote Start the climate controls will not function dur ing Remote Start operation if the blower control is left in the O Off position e Please read the Automatic Temperature Control Operation Chart that follows for details 149 Automatic Temperature Control Operation The system will Air Temperature Air Recirculation Operation How Blower Control Mode Control Control Control A C Operation Full Automatic Operation Set blower knob to either Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic but can Automatic Hi or Lo Auto Set mode knob be overridden to Auto Set temperature for 10 minutes knobs for comfort at a time Blower Preferred Automatic Set blower knob to any User selectable Automatic Automatic Au
337. sure the key is not inside the vehicle before closing the door WARNING e For personal security and safety in the event of an accident lock the vehicle doors before you drive as well as when you park and leave the vehicle e When leaving the vehicle always remove the key from the ignition and lock your vehicle Unsupervised use of vehicle equip ment may cause severe personal injuries and death e Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally in jured Don t leave the key in the ignition or leave a vehicle with Keyless Go in the ACC or RUN position A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle Power Door Lock Switch If you press the power door lock switch while the Key Fob is in the ignition ACC or RUN position and any front door is open the power locks will not operate This prevents you from accidentally locking the Key Fob in the vehicle Removing the Key Fob returning the ignition mode to the OFF position or closing the door will allow the locks to operate If a door is open the Key Fob is in the ignition OFF or ACC position a chime will sound as a reminder to Power Door Locks remove the Key Fob A power door lock switch is on each front door trim panel Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors If your vehicle is equipped with Keyless Go opening
338. system Press the top of the VOLUME but ton to increase the sound level Press the bottom of the VOLUME button to decrease the sound level AUDIO MODE Button Press the AUDIO MODE button to select the Compass Temp Audio screen This screen displays radio and media mode information de pending on which radio is in the vehicle If the Compass Temp Audio screen is already displayed when the AUDIO MODE button is pressed then the mode will change i e from AM to FM to Media mode etc depending on which radio is in the vehicle FUNCTION SELECT Button When the EVIC is in the Compass Temp Audio screen press the FUNCTION SELECT button to op erate various radio media and Universal Customer Interface UCI functions i e advance presets select next folder jump to or start playing songs in playlists etc depending on which radio is in the vehicle and if equipped with UCI SCROLL Button When the EVIC is in the Compass A Temp Audio screen press the v SCROLL button to seek up and down radio stations tracks chap ters files etc depending on which radio is in the vehicle CD DVD MAINTENANCE To keep a CD DVD in good condition take the following precautions 1 Handle the disc by its edge avoid touching the surface 2 If the disc is stained clean the surface with a soft cloth wiping from center to edge 3 Do not apply paper or tape to the disc avoid scratching the disc 4 Do not use s
339. t the positive cable is at tached to the positive post and the negative cable is attached to the negative post Battery posts are marked positive and negative and are identified on the bat tery case Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal posts and free of corrosion e Ifa fast charger is used while the battery is in the vehicle disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to the battery Do not use a fast CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your air con ditioning system as the chemicals can dam age your air conditioning components Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty charger to provide starting voltage Air Conditioner Maintenance For best possible performance your air condi tioner should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the start of each warm season This service should include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time 230 WARNING e Use only refrigerants and compressor lubri cants approved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning system Some unap proved refrigerants are flammable and can explode injuring you Other unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail requiring costly repairs e The air conditioning system contains refrig erant under high pressure To avoid risk of personal injury or damage to
340. tain driving trailer towing and other situ ations ERS Operation When the shift lever is in the Drive position the transmission will operate automatically shifting between the five available gears Moving the 171 shift lever to the left D will activate ERS downshift the transmission and display the top available gear in the instrument cluster Once in ERS mode tapping the shift lever to the left D or right D will change the top available gear The transmission will not shift above the indi cated gear but will shift up and down normally automatically through the lower gears Hold ing the shift lever to the left D will shift the transmission to the lowest gear possible with out overspeeding the engine for maximum engine braking Holding the shift lever to the right D for a few seconds will disengage ERS mode AUTOSTICK IF EQUIPPED AutoStick is a driver interactive transmission feature that offers manual gear shifting to pro vide you with more control of the vehicle AutoStick allows you to maximize engine braking eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts and improve overall vehicle perfor mance This system can also provide you with more contro during passing city driving cold slippery conditions mountain driving trailer towing and many other situations 172 Operation When the shift lever is in the DRIVE position the transmission will operate automatically shifting between
341. tate tires 1 If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Replace the air conditioning filter if equipped Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Change the rear axle fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals replace if necessary Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 142 500 Miles 228 000 km or 114 Months Maintenance Service Schedule J Change the engine oil and engine oil filter t J Rotate tires Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 264 150 000 Miles 240 000 km or 120 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Tt Rotate tires Replace the engine air cleaner filter Replace the spark plugs 5 7L Engine Replace the air conditioning filter if equipped Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary 1 Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes J Inspect the rear axle fluid O O Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authoriz
342. te whenever the ACC system applies the brakes A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC predicts that its maximum braking level is not sufficient to maintain the set distance If this occurs a visual alert ATTENTION will flash in the EVIC and a chime will sound while ACC continues to apply its maximum braking capac ity When this occurs you should immediately apply the brakes as needed to maintain a safe distance from the vehicle ahead ATTENTION came ef THE m Adaptive Cruise Control ACC Menu The EVIC displays the current ACC system settings The EVIC is located in the upper part of the instrument cluster between the speed ometer and the tachometer The information it displays depends on ACC system status 101 Menu Button Press the Menu button located on the steering wheel repeatedly un til one of the following displays in the EVIC CRUISE OFF When ACC is deactivated the display will read CRUISE OFF mS n se 102 ACC READY When ACC is activated the display will read ACC READY mue mo ACC SET When ACC is set the set speed will display Ro 818e9500 1148 1 Sensed Vehicle Indicator 6 NO ni 2 Set Speed 3 Your Vehicle 4 Following Distance Setting Three Bars Long Two Bars Medium One Bar Short The set speed will continue to display in place of the odometer reading when chang ing the EVIC
343. the drivers door when the vehicle s ignition switch is placed in ACC or RUN engine 20 stopped will cause the reminder chime to sound For more information refer to Keyless Go If Equipped in Section 5 Automatic Door Locks The doors will lock automatically on vehicles with power door locks if all of the following conditions are met 1 The Automatic Door Locks feature is en abled 2 The transmission is in gear 3 All doors are closed 4 The throttle is pressed 5 The vehicle speed is above 15 mph 24 km h and 6 The doors were not previously locked using the power door lock switch or Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter Automatic Door Locks Programming The Automatic Door Locks feature can be enabled or disabled as follows e For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Ve hicle Information Center EVIC refer to Lock Doors Automatically at 15 mph 24 km h under Personal Settings Customer Pro grammable Features in the Electronic Ve hicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual e For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following procedure 1 Close all doors and place the Key Fob in the ignition switch 2 Cycle the ignition switch between OFF and RUN and then back to OFF four times ending up in the OFF position do not start engine 3 Depress the power door LOCK switch to lock the doors 4 A single chime will indicate the completion of th
344. the headlights within 45 sec onds The delay interval begins when the head ight switch is turned off f you turn the headlights or position lights on or place the ignition in the ACC or RUN position again the system will cancel the delay f you turn the headlights off before the ignition they will turn off in the normal manner NOTE The lights must be turned off within 45 sec onds of placing the ignition to the OFF position to activate this feature The headlight delay time is programmable on vehicles equipped with the EVIC Refer to De lay Turning Headlights Off under Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 Automatic Headlight Leveling If Equipped This feature prevents the headlights from inter fering with the vision of oncoming drivers Headlight leveling automatically adjusts the height of the headlight beam in reaction to changes in vehicle pitch Lights On Reminder If the headlights or position lights are on after the ignition is placed in the OFF position a chime will sound to alert the driver when the driver s door is opened Fog Lights If Equipped The fog light switch is built into the headlight switch To activate the fog lights turn on the position lights or the low beam headlights Press the headlight switch once for front fog lights press the switch a second time for front and rear fog lig
345. the other cable first to the negative terminal of the booster battery and then to the ground of the vehicle with the discharged battery Make sure you have a good contact on the ground Refer to the following illustration for jump starting connections Jump Starting 1 Positive Battery Post 2 Ground 3 Front of Vehicle 214 WARNING e You should not try to start your vehicle by pushing or towing e Do not connect the cable to the negative post of the discharged battery The result ing electrical spark could cause the battery to explode 7 Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster battery Let the engine idle a few min utes then start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery NOTE Refer to Synchronizing ESP under Elec tronic Stability Program in Section 5 if the ESP BAS light in the instrument cluster remains on continuously after starting the engine of the vehicle with the discharged battery 8 When removing the jumper cables reverse the above sequence exactly Be careful of the moving belts and fan WARNING Any procedure other than above could result in e Personal injury caused by electrolyte squirting out the battery vent e Personal injury or property damage due to battery explosion CAUTION Any procedure other than above could result in damage to charging system of booster vehicle or of immobilized vehicle FREEING A
346. the situation requiring Partial Off mode is overcome turn the ESP on again by momentarily pressing the ESP OFF switch This may be done while the vehicle is in motion Synchronizing ESP The Malfunction Indicator Light for the ESP is combined with BAS indicator If the power supply is interrupted battery disconnected or discharged the ESP BAS Mal function Indicator Light may illu minate with the engine running If this should occur turn the steering wheel completely to the left and then to the right The ESP BAS Mal function Indicator Light should go out How ever if the light remains on have the ESP and BAS checked at your authorized dealer as soon as possible ESP BAS 180 ESP BAS Malfunction Indicator Light and ESP TCS Indicator Light The Malfunction Indicator Light for the ESP is combined with the BAS indicator The ESP BAS Malfunc tion Indicator Light and the ESP TCS Indicator Light in the instru ment cluster both come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position They should go out with the engine running The system will turn the ESP BAS Malfunction Indicator Light on continuously while the en gine running if it detects a malfunction in either the ESP or the BAS or both If the light remains on after several ignition switch cycles and you have driven the vehicle several miles kilome ters at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h and the ESP is synchroniz
347. time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service i e vacation for two weeks or more run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting This will ensure ad equate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again REPLACEMENT BULBS LIGHT BULBS Interior Bulb Number Rear Courtesy Reading Lamps WSW Rear Compartment Trunk Lamp 562 Overhead Console Reading Lamps 578 Visor Vanity Lamps A6220 Glove Box Lamp If Equipped 194 Door 562 Shift Indicator Lamp JKLE14140 Optional Door Map Pocket Cupholder LED Serviced at Authorized Dealer NOTE For lighted switches see your authorized dealer for replacement instructions All of the interior bulbs are glass wedge base or glass cartridge types Aluminum base bulbs are not approved and should not be used for replacement 245 LIGHT BULBS Exterior Low Beam Headlamp High Intensity Discharge HID D1S Serviced at Authorized Dealer Bulb Number High Beam Headlamp 9005 Front Park Turn Lamp 3757AKPY27 7W Front PositionLamp W5W Front Fog LaMp 9145 H10 Serviced at Authorized Dealer Side Repeater Lamp WY5W Tail Stop Lamp 3157P27 7W Rear Turn Signal Lamp 3757AKPY27 7WK Backup Lamp 3157P
348. tion if equipped Sensed Vehicle Indicator The system de tects a slower moving vehicle in the same lane Refer to Adaptive Cruise Control ACC in Section if equipped Driver Override If you apply the accelera tor after setting the desired speed in the ACC system Refer to Adaptive Cruise Con trol ACC in Section 3 if equipped Distance Set After changing the desired following distance in the ACC system this message will display momentarily Refer to Adaptive Cruise Control ACC in Section 3 if equipped Attention If the ACC system predicts that its maximum braking level is not sufficient to maintain the set distance this message will flash and a chime will sound while ACC continues to apply its maximum braking ca pacity When this occurs you should imme diately apply the brakes as needed to main tain a safe distance from the vehicle ahead Refer to Adaptive Cruise Control ACC in Section 3 if equipped ACC Blinded If the ACC system deacti vates due to performance limiting condi tions Refer to Adaptive Cruise Control ACC in Section if equipped ACC Unavailable If the ACC system turns off due to a temporary malfunction that limits functionality Refer to Adaptive Cruise Con trol ACC in Section 3 if equipped Service ACC If the ACC system turns off due to an internal system fault that requires service from an authorized de
349. tle and radia tor Inspect the entire system for leaks With the engine at normal operating tempera ture but not running check the cooling sys tem pressure cap for proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of engine coolant antifreeze from the radiator drain cock If the cap is sealing properly the engine coolant antifreeze will begin to drain from the coolant recovery bottle DO NOT REMOVE THE COOL ANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT 233 Cooling System Drain Flush and Refill If the engine coolant antifreeze is dirty or contains a considerable amount of sediment clean and flush with a reliable cooling system cleaner Follow with a thorough rinsing to re move all deposits and chemicals Properly dis pose of the old engine coolant antifreeze solution Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Sec tion 8 for the proper maintenance intervals Selection of Coolant Use only the manufacturer s recommended en gine coolant antifreeze Refer to Fluids Lu bricants and Genuine Parts in this section for the correct fluid type 234 CAUTION Mixing of engine coolant antifreeze other than specified HOAT engine coolant anti freeze may result in engine damage and may decrease corrosion protection If a non HOAT engine coolant antifreeze is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency it should be replaced with the specified engine coolant antifreeze as Soon as possible
350. tomatic but can Automatic desired airflow level other to any speed be overridden than Hi or Lo Auto Set mode for 10 minutes knob to Auto Set temperature at a time knobs for comfort Mode Preferred Automatic Set mode knob to any desired Automatic User selectable Automatic User selectable User selectable air delivery point other than to any air outside or A C on or off Auto Set blower knob to delivery point recirculated either Hi or Lo Auto Set temperature knobs for comfort Blower and Mode Set blower knob to any User selectable User selectable Automatic User selectable User selectable Preferred Automatic desired airflow level other than Hi or Lo Auto Set mode knob to any desired air delivery point other than Auto Set temperature knobs for comfort to any speed to any air delivery point outside or recirculated A C on or off 81341de7 The operator can override the AUTO mode setting to change airflow distribution by rotating the mode control knob on the right to one of the following positions e Defrost Air is directed to the windshield through the outlets at the base of the wind shield Air is also directed to the front door windows through the side window demis ter grilles e Defrost Floor Ve Air flows through the front and rear floor outlets and the outlets at the base of the windshield Air is also directed to the front door windows through the side window demiste
351. tor If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING WARNING e Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel e Getting under a jacked up vehicle is dan gerous The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you You could be crushed Never get any part of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on a jack If you need to get under a raised vehicle take itto a service center where it can be raised on a lift e The jack is designed to use as a tool for changing tires only The jack should not be used to lift the vehicle for service purposes The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level surface only Avoid ice or slippery areas Jack Location Spare Tire Stowage The jack and spare tire are both stowed under an access cover in the trunk Follow these steps to access the jack and spare tire NOTE The spare tire must be removed in order to access the jack 1 Open the trunk 2 Lift the access cover using the pull strap 81344fb9 Opening The Access Panel 3 Remove the fastener securing the spare tire 81205587
352. ts 87 Automatic Temperature Control ATC 148 Automatic Transaxle Special Additives 238 Automatic Transmission 166 169 237 238 Adding Fluid 238 252 ss usas do 172 Fluid and Filter Changes 238 Fluid Change 238 Fluid Level Check 237 Fluid Type sor ae 252 Gear Ranges 167 169 Overdrive 168 deua ga 166 169 Special Additives 238 Torque Converter 168 Automatic Transmission Limp Home MOS 169 171 AULOSUCK zudem Go BEES ee xd 172 Axle Fluid 252 Axle Lubrication Axle Fluid 252 Battery SAR da 229 Emergency Starting 212 Jump Starting 212 Keyless Transmitter Replacement RSE squadre 19 Erejo ti Toro MP we a ees 213 229 Belts Seat 28 50 Body Mechanism Lubrication 231 Brake Assist System 178 Brake Control System Electronic 177 Brake Fluid uz kx 252 Brake Parking m mee 175 Brake System 236 Anti Lock ABS 176 Fluid Check 236 252 Master Cylinder 236 te ees Pg 175 Warning Light 127 BrakeS ce eno RR a s 236 Brake Transmission Interlock 166 Break In Recommendations New Climate Control 00 148 Selection of Coo
353. ts particularly unattended children can become entrapped by the windows while operating the power window switches Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death AUTO Down Feature The driver door power window switch and some model passenger door power window switches have an AUTO down feature Press the window switch to the second detent re lease and the window will go down automati cally To open the window part way press the window switch to the first detent and release it when you want the window to stop To stop the window from going all the way down during the AUTO down operation pull up on the switch briefly AUTO Up Feature with Anti Pinch Protection If Equipped Lift the window switch to the second detent release and the window will go up automati cally To stop the window from going all the way up during the AUTO up operation push down on the switch briefly To close the window part way lift the window switch to the first detent and release it when you want the window to stop 25 NOTE e If the window runs into any obstacle dur ing auto closure it will reverse direction and then go back down Remove the ob stacle and use the window switch again to close the window e Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger the auto reverse function un expectedly during auto closure If this happens pull the switch lightly to the first detent and hold to close the window
354. tured The Owner s Manual illustrates and describes the features that are standard or available as extra cost options Therefore some of the equipment and accessories in this publication may not appear on your vehicle NOTE Be sure to read the Owner s Manual first before driving your vehicle and before at taching or installing parts accessories or making other modifications to the vehicle In view of the many replacement parts and accessories from various manufacturers avail able on the market the manufacturer cannot be certain that the driving safety of your vehicle will not be impaired by the attachment or instal lation of such parts Even if such parts are officially approved for example by a general operating permit for the part or by constructing the part in an officially approved design or if an individual operating permit was issued for the vehicle after the attachment or installation of such parts it cannot be implicitly assumed that the driving safety of your vehicle is unim paired Therefore neither experts nor official agencies are liable Therefore the manufacturer only assumes responsibility when parts which are expressly authorized or recommended by the manufacturer are attached or installed at an authorized dealer The same applies when modifications to the original condition are sub sequently made on the manufacturers ve hicles Your warranties do not cover any part that the manu
355. ty To select or delete a paired phone being announced press the 6 button and say Select or Delete Also see the next two sections for an alternate way to select or delete a paired phone 70 Select Another Cellular Phone This feature allows you to select and start using another phone paired with the uconnect phone e Press the to button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Select Phone and follow the prompts e You can also press the Te button at any time while the list is being played and then choose the phone that you wish to select e The selected phone will be used for the next phone call If the selected phone is not available the uconnect phone will return to using the highest priority phone present in or near approximately within 30 ft 9 m the vehicle Delete uconnect phone Paired Cellular Phones e Press the to button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing e At the next prompt say Delete and follow the prompts e You can also press the button at any time while the list is being Played and then choose the phone you wish to delete Things You Should Know About Your uconnect phone uconnect phone Tutorial To hear a brief tutorial of the uconnect phone features press the to button and say uconnect Tutorial Voice Training For users ex
356. uipped panel This center contains fuses and relays Opening The Access Panel Rear Power Distribution Center 81344fb9 812da393 CAUTION e When installing the power distribution cen ter cover it is important to ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully latched Failure to do so may allow water to get into the power distribution center and possibly result in an electrical system failure e When replacing a blown fuse it is important to use only a fuse having the correct am perage rating The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result in a dangerous electrical system overload If a properly rated fuse continues to blow it indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected Cav Car Mini Description Cav Car Mini Description ity tridge Fuse ity tridge Fuse Fuse Fuse 1 60 Amp Ignition Off Draw 7 15 Amp Rear Heated Yellow IOD Cavity 1 of Blue Seats If the Rear Power Equipped Distribution Center 8 15 Amp Diagnostic Link contains a black Blue Connector DLC IOD fuse needed Wireless Control for vehicle pro Module WCM cessing during as Wireless Ignition sembly The ser Node WIN vice replacement 9 20 Amp Power Outlet part is a 60 Amp Yellow yellow cartridge 10 10 Amp Rear Fog Lamp fuse Red 2 40 Amp Integrated Power 1 E _ Green Module IPM 12
357. uld only be replaced with a battery of the same type vented e During cold weather when temperatures are below the freezing point electrolyte ina discharged battery may freeze Do not at tempt jump starting because the battery could rupture or explode The battery tem perature must be brought above the freez ing point before attempting jump start NOTE The battery is stored under an access cover in the trunk Remote battery terminals are located in the engine compartment for jump starting 1 Wear eye protection and remove any metal jewelry such as watchbands or bracelets that might make an inadvertent electrical contact 2 When boost is provided by a battery in another vehicle park that vehicle within booster cable reach but do not allow the vehicles to touch one another WARNING Do not permit vehicles to touch each other as this could establish a ground connection and personal injury could result 3 Set the parking brake place the automatic transmission in PARK and place the ignition to the OFF LOCK position on both vehicles 4 Turn off the heater radio and all unneces sary electrical loads 5 Connect one end of the jumper cable to the remote jump start positive battery post in the engine compartment Connect the other end of the same cable to the positive terminal of the booster battery Refer to the following illustration for jump starting connections 213 6 Connect
358. und system providing metadata art ist track title album etc information on the radio display 144 e The iPod can be controlled using the radio buttons to Play Browse and List the iPod contents e The iPod battery charges when plugged into the UCI connector if supported by the specific iPod device Controlling The iPod Using Radio Buttons To get into the UCI iPod mode and access a connected iPod press the AUX button on the radio faceplate Once in the UCI iPod mode iPod audio tracks if available from iPod start playing over the vehicle s audio system Play Mode When switched to UCI mode the iPod auto matically starts Play mode In Play mode you may use the following buttons on the radio faceplate to control the iPod and display data e Use the TUNE control knob to select the next or previous track e Turning it clockwise forward by one click while playing a track skips to the next track e Turning it counterclockwise backward by one click during the first two seconds of the track will jump to the previous track in the list Turning this button at any other time in the track will jump to the begin ning of the current track e Jump backward in the current track by pressing and holding the lt lt RW button Holding the lt lt RW button long enough will take you to the beginning of the current track Jump forward in the current track by pr
359. unted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure lev els Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the receiver module NOTE It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to maintain the proper pressure The TPMS consists of the following compo nents e Receiver module e Four TPM sensors e Various TPMS messages which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC and e TPM Telltale Light The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly if equipped has a TPM sensor The full size spare can be used in place of any of the four road tires A spare with a pressure below the low pressure limit will not cause the TPM Telltale Light to illuminate or the chime to sound Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings The TPM Telltale Light will illuminate in e the instrument cluster and a chime will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the four active road tires In addition the EVIC will display one or more low pressure messages Left Front Left Rear Right Front Right Rear for three seconds and a graphic showing the pressure values of each tire with the low tire pressure values flashing Low Tire FSI 2 Zl 22485 mi 819793fc Should this occur you should stop as soon as possible and inflate the tires with a low pressure condition those flash
360. urer does not recommend that you tow this vehicle on a tow dolly Vehicle damage may occur 217 218 220 ENGINE COMPARTMENT 2 7L Q G 4 M Go O O 81c6cbbe 1 Integrated Power Module 6 Air Cleaner Filter 2 Engine Oil Dipstick 7 Coolant Pressure Cap 3 Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover 8 Engine Oil Fill 4 Engine Coolant Reservoir 9 Remote Jump Start Positive Battery Post 5 Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 10 Washer Fluid Reservoir 221 ENGINE COMPARTMENT 3 5L 1 Integrated Power Module 2 Air Cleaner Filter 3 Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover 4 Coolant Pressure Cap 5 Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 81 6 Engine Coolant Reservoir 7 Engine Oil Fill 8 Engine Oil Dipstick 9 Washer Fluid Reservoir 10 Remote Jump Start Positive Battery Post 222 ENGINE COMPARTMENT 5 7L VN o 1 Integrated Power Module 6 Air Cleaner Filter 2 Coolant Pressure Cap 7 Engine Oil Fill 3 Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover 8 Engine Oil Dipstick 4 Engine Coolant Reservoir 9 Remote Jump Start Positive Battery Post 5 Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 10 Washer Fluid Reservoir 223 ENGINE COMPARTMENT 3 0L DIESEL Q 1 Fuses Front Power Distribution Center 2 Diesel Fuse Relay Box Located Un
361. usu ky d Ea m dnd 126 Automatic Headlights 87 Brake Assist Warning 180 Brake Warning 127 Bulb Replacement 245 Courtesy Reading 89 113 Cruise uas 125 Dimmer Switch Headlight 89 Electronic Stability Program ESP INGICALOR sus ue dedo eae ee 180 Electronic Throttle Control Warning 129 Engine Temperature Warning 126 EXIGFIO dee eae 50 FOG axem ate er eee See A 125 126 Hazard Warning Flasher 206 Headlight Switch 87 Headlights i sa een ee 87 246 Headlights On With Wipers 88 91 High 89 128 High Beam Indicator 128 Illuminated Entry 16 Instrument Cluster 87 qom ia bea 113 ss ce Ds gs 248 Lights On Reminder 88 E A ite und 125 une sar od Lum RR do 129 Malfunction Indicator Check Engine 130 Oil Pressure au ogee ae Boe 125 Passing 89 Headlfigi 113 Seat Belt Reminder 128 Service 245 246 Service Engine Soon Malfunction Indicator 130 Tire Pressure Monitoring TEMS ende wok i stl 129 186 Traction Control 180 TU Signal 2s cues 50 89 125 Vanity Miror ee Eoia 59 VONAGE bina aa E 130 Wait to Start
362. ve stem cap This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the valve stem nflation pressures specified on the placard are always cold tire inflation pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure 181 after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after a three hour period The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum infla tion pressure molded into the tire sidewall Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures as tire pressures vary with temperature changes Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi 7 kPa per 12 F 7 C of air temperature change Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage especially in the Winter Example If garage temperature 68 F 20 C and the outside temperature 32 F 0 C then the cold tire inflation pressure should be in creased by 3 psi 21 kPa which equals 1 psi 7 kPa for every 12 F 7 C for this outside temperature condition Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi 13 to 40 kPa during operation DO NOT reduce this normal pressure build up or your tire pres sure will be too low 182 Tire Pressures for High Speed Operation The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds within posted speed limits Where speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle can be dr
363. ved from the ignition switch for key fob use 2 Insert the metal part of the emergency key under the chrome bezel at the 6 o clock posi tion and gently pry the button loose NOTE The ENGINE START STOP button should only be removed or inserted with the ignition switch in the LOCK position OFF position for Keyless Go 160 Normal Starting Using the ENGINE START STOP Button NOTE Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal To start the engine the transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL Press and hold the brake pedal while pressing the ENGINE START STOP button once The system takes over and at tempts to start the vehicle If the vehicle fails to start the starter will disengage automatically after 10 seconds If you wish to stop the crank ing of the engine prior to the engine starting press the button again To Turn Off the Engine Using ENGINE START STOP Button 1 Place the shift lever in PARK then press and release the ENGINE START STOP button 2 The ignition switch will return to the OFF position 3 If the shift lever is not in PARK the ENGINE START STOP button must be held for two sec onds and vehicle speed must be above 5 mph 8 km h before the engine will shut off The ignition switch position will remain in the ACC position until the shift lever is in PARK and the button is pressed twice to the OFF position If the shift l
364. versation coming from the other party but the other party will not be able to hear you In order to mute the uconnect phone e Press the 6 button e Following the beep say Mute In order to un mute the uconnect phone e Press the 6 button e Following the beep say Mute off Advanced Phone Connectivity Transfer Call to and from Cellular Phone The uconnect phone allows ongoing calls to be transferred from your cellular phone to the uconnect phone without terminating the call To transfer an ongoing call from your uconnect phone paired cellular phone to the uconnect phone or vice versa press the amp button and say Transfer Call 69 Connect or Disconnect Link Between the uconnect phone and Cellular Phone Your cellular phone can be paired with many different electronic devices but can only be actively connected with one electronic device at a time If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth connection between a uconnect phone paired cellular phone the uconnect phone follow the instructions de scribed in your cellular phone User s Manual List Paired Cellular Phone Names e Press the 2 button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing e When prompted say List Phones e The uconnect phone will play the phone names of all paired cellular phones in order from the highest to the lowest priori
365. vice is required WARNING A malfunctioning catalytic converter as refer enced above can reach higher temperatures than in normal operating conditions This can cause a fire if you drive slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry plants or wood or cardboard etc This could result in death or serious injury to the driver occupants or others ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER EVIC IF EQUIPPED The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC features a driver interactive display and is located in the instrument cluster 041006603 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Vehicles equipped with steering wheel mounted buttons described in this section are also equipped with the EVIC The EVIC con sists of the following e System status e Vehicle information warning message dis plays e Tire Pressure Monitor System if equipped e Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features e Compass display e Outside temperature display e Trip computer functions e uconnect displays if equipped e uconnect gps screens if equipped e Audio mode display e Surround Sound modes if equipped with Driver Selectable Surround DSS The system allows the driver to select informa tion by pressing the following buttons mounted on the steering wheel MENU Button Press and release the MENU but ton and the mode displayed will change between Trip Functions uconnect
366. voice com mandas Phonebook and New Entry Please remember the uconnect phone works best when you talk in a normal conversational tone as if speaking to someone sitting a few feet meters away from you Voice Command Tree Refer to Voice Tree Help Command If you need assistance at any prompt or if you want to know your options at any prompt say Help following the beep The uconnect phone will play all the options at any prompt if you ask for help To activate the uconnect phone from idle sim ply press the 4 button and follow the audible prompts for directions All uconnect phone sessions begin with a press of the o button on the radio control head Cancel Command At any prompt after the beep you can say Cancel and you will be returned to the main menu However in a few instances the system will take you back to the previous menu Pair Link uconnect phone to a Cellular Phone To begin using your uconnect phone you must pair your compatible Bluetooth enabled cellular phone refer to Compatible Phones section to learn about the phone type To complete the pairing process you will need to reference your cellular phone owner s manual The uconnect website may also pro vide detailed instructions for pairing The following are general phone to uconnect phone pairing instructions e Press the 19 button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say
367. vy traffic and complex driving situations i e in highway construc tion zones Continued Continued WARNING Continued e When entering a turn lane or highway off ramp when driving on roads that are wind ing icy snow covered slippery or have steep uphill or downhill slopes and when towing a trailer e When circumstances do not allow safe driving at a constant speed Failure to follow these warnings can result in an accident or serious personal injury The Cruise Control system has two contro modes e Adaptive cruise control mode for maintaining an appropriate distance between vehicles e Normal fixed speed cruise control mode for cruising at a constant preset speed For additional information refer to Normal Fixed Speed Cruise Control Mode in this section Note The system will not react to preceding vehicles Always be aware of the mode selected 97 You can change the mode by using the control lever The two control modes function differ ently Always confirm which mode is selected Adaptive Cruise Control ACC Operation The speed control lever located on the left side of the steering column operates the ACC sys tem 032306833 Adaptive Cruise Control Lever 1 RESUME ACCEL 2 SET DECEL 3 CANCEL 4 DISTANCE SETTING 5 MODE ON OFF 98 Activating Adaptive Cruise Control ACC You can only activate ACC if the vehicle speed
368. wing can lead to an injury acci dent Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as possible e Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer and that it will not shift during travel When trailering cargo that is not fully se cured dynamic load shifts can occur that may be difficult for the driver to control You could lose control of your vehicle and have an accident e All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle e When hauling cargo or towing a trailer do not overload your vehicle or trailer Over loading can cause a loss of control poor performance or damage to brakes axle engine transmission steering suspen sion chassis structure or tires Continued WARNING Continued 1 2 Safety chains must always be used be tween your vehicle and trailer Always con nect the chains to the frame or hook retain ers of the vehicle hitch Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for turning corners Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade When parking apply the park ing brake on the tow vehicle Put the tow vehicle automatic transmission in PARK Always block or chock the trailer wheels GCWR must not be exceeded Total weight must be distributed be tween the tow vehicle and the trailer such that the following four ratings are not exceeded GVWR GTW 3 GAWR 4 Tongue weight rating for the trail
369. wiping parallel to the heating ele ments Labels can be peeled off after soak ing with warm water Do not use scrapers sharp instruments or abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window e Keep all objects a safe distance from the window LOAD LEVELING SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED The automatic load leveling system will provide a level riding vehicle under most passenger and cargo loading conditions A hydraulic pump contained within the shock absorbers raises the rear of the vehicle to the correct height It takes approximately 1 mile 1 6 km of driving for the leveling to complete depending on road surface conditions If the leveled vehicle is not moved for approxi mately 15 hours the leveling system will bleed itself down The vehicle must be driven to reset the system 119 120 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES 123 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER A 124 e INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS 125 e ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER EVIC IFJEQUIPPED to oa 131 e Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Displays 132 Engine Oil Change Indicator System 134 exTripiEunctions ac paa as Sepa E ER 134 e Automatic All Wheel Drive AWD Displays EQUIP 136 Keyless Go Display If Equipped 137 Driver Selectable Surround Sound DSS If Equipped
370. with Keyless Go then start the engine e Shift into DRIVE and resume driving NOTE Even if the transmission can be reset we recommend that you visit an authorized dealer at your earliest possible conve nience Your authorized dealer has diagnos tic equipment to determine if the problem could recur If the transmission cannot be reset authorized dealer service is required Five Speed Automatic Transmission If Equipped Shifting from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE should be done only after the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when moving the shift lever between these gears Shift Lever Gear Ranges PARK This range supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission The engine can be started in this range Never use PARK while the 169 vehicle is in motion Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range When parking on a flat surface place the shift lever in the PARK position first and then apply the parking brake When parking on a hill it is important to set the parking brake before placing the shift lever in PARK otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK As an added precaution turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade WARNING Never use the PARK position as a substitute

7 - Silberauto

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents